|
|
| |
S-NAIL(1) |
FreeBSD General Commands Manual |
S-NAIL(1) |
S-nail [v14.9.24] —
send and receive Internet mail
s-nail |
[-DdEFinv~# ]
[-: spec]
[-A account]
[:-a attachment:]
[:-b bcc-addr:]
[:-C "field: body":]
[:-c cc-addr:]
[-M type | -m file | -q file | -t ]
[-r from-addr]
[:-S var[=value]:]
[-s subject]
[:-T "field: addr":]
[:-X cmd:]
[:-Y cmd:]
[-. ] :to-addr:
[- - :mta-option:] |
s-nail |
[-DdEeHiNnRv~# ]
[-: spec]
[-A account]
[:-C "field: body":]
[-L spec]
[-r from-addr]
[:-S var[=value]:]
[-u user]
[:-X cmd:]
[:-Y cmd:]
[- - :mta-option:] |
s-nail |
[-DdEeHiNnRv~# ]
[-: spec]
[-A account]
[:-C "field: body":] -f
[-L spec]
[-r from-addr]
[:-S var[=value]:]
[:-X cmd:]
[:-Y cmd:]
[file]
[- - :mta-option:] |
Note: S-nail (S-nail) will see major
changes in v15.0 (circa 2022). Some backward incompatibilities cannot be
avoided. COMMANDS change to
Shell-style argument
quoting, and shell metacharacters will become (more) meaningful. Some
commands accept new syntax today via wysh
( Command modifiers). Behaviour is
flagged [v15-compat] and [no v15-compat], set ting
v15-compat
( INTERNAL VARIABLES) will choose
new behaviour when applicable; giving it a value makes
wysh an implied default. [Obsolete] flags what will
vanish.
Warning! v15-compat (with
value) will be a default in v14.10.0!
S-nail provides a simple and friendly environment for sending and
receiving mail. It is intended to provide the functionality of the POSIX
mailx(1)
command, but is MIME capable and optionally offers extensions for line
editing, S/MIME, SMTP and POP3, among others. S-nail divides incoming mail
into its constituent messages and allows the user to deal with them in any
order. It offers many COMMANDS and
INTERNAL VARIABLES for
manipulating messages and sending mail. It provides the user simple editing
capabilities to ease the composition of outgoing messages, and increasingly
powerful and reliable non-interactive scripting capabilities.
-:
spec,
- -resource-files =..
- Controls loading of (as via
source )
Resource files:
spec is parsed case-insensitively, the letter
‘s ’ corresponds to the system wide
s-nail.rc,
‘u ’ the user's personal file
~/.mailrc. The (original) system wide resource is
also compiled-in, accessible via
‘x ’. The letters
‘- ’ and
‘/ ’ disable usage of resource files.
Order matters, default is ‘su ’. This
option overrides -n .
-A
name,
- -account =..
- Activate user
account name
after program startup is complete (resource files loaded, only
-X commands are to be executed), and switch to its
primary system mailbox
(most likely the inbox). If activation fails the
program exit s if used non-interactively, or if any
of errexit or posix are
set.
-a
file[=input-charset[#output-charset]],
- -attach =..
- (Send mode) Attach file. For (Compose mode)
opportunities refer to
~@ and
~^ . file is subject to tilde
expansion (see Filename
transformations and folder ); if it is not
accessible but contains a ‘= ’
character, anything before the last
‘= ’ will be used as the filename,
anything thereafter as a character set specification, as shown.
If only an input character set is specified, the input side is
fixed, and no character set conversion will be applied; an empty or the
special string hyphen-minus ‘- ’ is
taken for ttycharset (the default). If an output
character set has also been specified the desired conversion is
performed immediately, not considering file type and content, except for
an empty string or hyphen-minus
‘- ’, which select the default
conversion algorithm (see Character
sets): no immediate conversion is performed,
file and its contents will be MIME-classified
(HTML mail and MIME
attachments, The
mime.types files) first — only the latter mode is available
unless features includes
‘,+iconv, ’.
-B
- ([Obsolete]: S-nail will always use line-buffered output, to gain
line-buffered input even in batch mode enable batch mode via
-# .)
-b
addr,
- -bcc =..
- (Send mode) Send a blind carbon copy to recipient
addr. The option may be used multiple times. Also
see the section
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
-C
"field: body",
- -custom-header =..
- Create a custom header which persists for an entire session. A custom
header consists of the field name followed by a colon
‘
: ’ and the field content body, for
example ‘-C "Blah: Neminem laede; imo omnes,
quantum potes, juva" ’. Standard header field names
cannot be overwritten by custom headers. Runtime adjustable custom headers
are available via the variable customhdr, and in
(Compose mode) ~^ , one of the
COMMAND ESCAPES, as well as
digmsg are the most flexible and powerful options
to manage message headers. This option may be used multiple times.
-c
addr,
- -cc =..
- (Send mode) Just like
-b , except it places the
argument in the list of carbon copies.
-D ,
- -disconnected
- [Option] Startup with disconnected
set .
-d ,
- -debug
- Enter a debug-only sandbox mode by setting the internal variable
debug; the same can be achieved via
‘
-S
debug ’ or
‘set
debug ’. Also see
-v .
-E ,
- -discard-empty-messages
- (Send mode)
set
skipemptybody and thus discard messages with an
empty message part body, successfully.
-e ,
- -check-and-exit
- Just check if mail is present (in the system inbox
or the one specified via
-f ): if yes, return an
exit status of zero, a non-zero value otherwise. To restrict the set of
mails to consider in this evaluation a message specification can be added
with the option -L . Quickrun: does not open an
interactive session.
-F
- (Send mode) Save the message to send in a file named after the local part
of the first recipient's address (instead of in
record).
-f ,
- -file
- Read in the contents of the user's
secondary mailbox
MBOX (or the specified file) for processing; when
S-nail is quit, it writes undeleted messages back to this file (but be
aware of the hold option). The optional
file argument will undergo some special
Filename
transformations (as via folder ). Note that
file is not an argument to the flag
-f , but is instead taken from the command line
after option processing has been completed. In order to use a
file that starts with a hyphen-minus, prefix with a
relative path, as in
‘./-hyphenbox.mbox ’.
-H ,
- -header-summary
- Display a summary of
headers for the given
folder (depending on -u ,
inbox or MAIL , or as
specified via -f ), then exit. A configurable
summary view is available via the option -L . This
mode does not honour showlast. Quickrun: does not
open an interactive session.
-h ,
- -help
- Show a brief usage summary; use
- -long-help for a list
long options.
-i
set
ignore to ignore tty interrupt signals.
-L
spec,
- -search =..
- Display a summary of
headers of all messages that
match the given spec in the
folder found by the same algorithm used by
-H , then exit. See the section
Specifying messages for the
format of spec. This mode does not honour
showlast.
If the -e option has been given in
addition no header summary is produced, but S-nail will instead indicate
via its exit status whether spec matched any
messages (‘0 ’) or not
(‘1 ’); note that any verbose
output is suppressed in this mode and must instead be enabled explicitly
(see -v ). Quickrun: does not open an interactive
session.
-M
type
- (Send mode) Will flag standard input with the MIME
‘
Content-Type: ’ set to the given
known type
(HTML mail and MIME
attachments, The mime.types
files) and use it as the main message body. [v15 behaviour may differ]
Using this option will bypass processing of
message-inject-head and
message-inject-tail. Also see
-q , -m ,
-t .
-m
file
- (Send mode) MIME classify the specified file and use
it as the main message body. [v15 behaviour may differ] Using this option
will bypass processing of message-inject-head and
message-inject-tail. Also see
-q , -M ,
-t .
-N ,
- -no-header-summary
- inhibit the initial display of message headers when reading mail or
editing a mailbox
folder by calling
unset for the internal variable
header.
-n
- Standard flag that inhibits reading the system wide
s-nail.rc upon startup. The option
-: allows more control over the startup sequence;
also see Resource files.
-q
file,
- -quote-file =..
- (Send mode) Initialize the message body with the contents of
file, which may be standard input
‘
- ’ only in non-interactive context.
Also see -M , -m ,
-t .
-R ,
- -read-only
- Any mailbox
folder aka
folder opened will be in read-only mode.
-r
from-addr,
- -from-address =..
- The RFC 5321 reverse-path used for relaying and delegating messages to its
destination(s), for example to report delivery errors, is normally derived
from the address which appears in the from header
(or, if that contains multiple addresses, in
sender). A file-based aka local executable
mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent), however, instead uses the
local identity of the initiating user.
When this command line option is used the given single
addressee from-addr will be assigned to the
internal variable from, but in addition the
command line option -f
from-addr will be passed to a file-based
mta whenever a message is sent. Shall
from-addr include a user name the address
components will be separated and the name part will be passed to a
file-based mta individually via
-F name. Even though not a
recipient the ‘shquote ’
expandaddr flag is supported.
If an empty string is passed as
from-addr then the content of the variable
from (or, if that contains multiple addresses,
sender) will be evaluated and used for this
purpose whenever the file-based mta is contacted.
By default, without -r that is, neither
-f nor -F command line
options are used when contacting a file-based MTA, unless this automatic
deduction is enforced by set ting the internal
variable r-option-implicit.
Remarks: many default installations and sites disallow
overriding the local user identity like this unless either the MTA has
been configured accordingly or the user is member of a group with
special privileges. Passing an invalid address will cause an error.
-S
var[=value],
- -set =..
set
(or, with a prefix string ‘no ’, as
documented in INTERNAL
VARIABLES, unset )
variable and optionally assign
value, if supported; [v15 behaviour may differ] the
entire expression is evaluated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes
(see Shell-style
argument quoting) if the internal variable
v15-compat is set. If the operation fails the
program will exit if any of errexit or
posix are set. Settings established via
-S cannot be changed from within
Resource files or an account
switch initiated by -A . They will become mutable
again before commands registered via -X are
executed.
-s
subject,
- -subject =..
- (Send mode) Specify the subject of the message to be sent. Newline (NL)
and carriage-return (CR) bytes are invalid and will be normalized to space
(SP) characters.
-T
"field: addr",
- -target =..
- (Send mode) Add addr to the list of receivers
targeted by field, for now supported are only
‘
bcc ’,
‘cc ’,
‘fcc ’, and
‘to ’. Field and body (address) are
separated by a colon ‘: ’ and
optionally blank (space, tabulator) characters. The
‘shquote ’
expandaddr flag is supported.
addr is parsed like a message header address line,
as if it would be part of a template message fed in via
-t , and the same modifier suffix is supported.
This option may be used multiple times.
-t ,
- -template
- (Send mode) The text message given (on standard input) is expected to
contain, separated from the message body by an empty line, one or multiple
plain text message headers. [v15 behaviour may differ] Readily prepared
MIME mail messages cannot be passed. Headers can span multiple consecutive
lines if follow lines start with any amount of whitespace. A line starting
with the number sign ‘
# ’ in the
first column is ignored. Message recipients can be given via the message
headers ‘To: ’,
‘Cc: ’,
‘Bcc: ’ (the
‘?single ’ modifier enforces
treatment as a single addressee, for example
‘To?single: exa, <m@ple> ’) or
‘Fcc: ’, they will be added to any
recipients specified on the command line, and are likewise subject to
expandaddr validity checks. If a message subject is
specified via ‘Subject: ’ then it
will be used in favour of one given on the command line.
More optional headers are
‘Reply-To: ’ (possibly overriding
reply-to),
‘Sender: ’
(sender),
‘From: ’
(from and / or option -r ).
‘Message-ID: ’,
‘In-Reply-To: ’,
‘References: ’ and
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’, by default
created automatically dependent on message context, will be used if
specified (a special address massage will however still occur for the
latter). Any other custom header field (also see
-C , customhdr and
~^ ) is passed through entirely unchanged, and in
conjunction with the options -~ or
-# it is possible to embed
COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see
-M , -m ,
-q .
-u
user,
- -inbox-of =..
- Initially read the primary
system mailbox of user, appropriate privileges
presumed; effectively identical to
‘
-f %user ’.
-V ,
- -version
- Show S-nails version and exit. The command
version will also show the list of
features: ‘$ s-nail -:/
-Xversion -Xx ’.
-v ,
- -verbose
set s
the internal variable verbose to enable logging of
informational context messages. (Increases level of verbosity when used
multiple times.) Also see -d .
-X
cmd,
- -startup-cmd =..
- Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument)
cmd to a list of commands to be executed before
normal operation starts. The commands will be evaluated as a unit, just as
via
source . Correlates with
-# and errexit.
-Y
cmd,
- -cmd =..
- Add the given (or multiple for a multiline argument)
cmd to a list of commands to be executed after
normal operation has started. The commands will be evaluated successively
in the given order, and as if given on the program's standard input
— before interactive prompting begins in interactive mode, after
standard input has been consumed otherwise.
-~ ,
- -enable-cmd-escapes
- Enable COMMAND ESCAPES in
(Compose mode) even in non-interactive use cases. This can for example be
used to automatically format the composed message text before sending the
message:
$ ( echo 'line one. Word. Word2.';\
echo '~| /usr/bin/fmt -tuw66' ) |\
LC_ALL=C s-nail -d~:/ -Sttycharset=utf-8 bob@exam.ple
-# ,
- -batch-mode
- Enables batch mode: standard input is made line buffered, the complete set
of (interactive) commands is available, processing of
COMMAND ESCAPES is enabled in
Compose mode, and diverse
INTERNAL VARIABLES are
adjusted for batch necessities, exactly as if done via
-S : emptystart,
noerrexit, noheader,
noposix, quiet,
sendwait, typescript-mode as
well as MAIL , MBOX and
inbox (the latter three to
/dev/null). Also, the values of
COLUMNS and LINES are
looked up, and acted upon. The following prepares an email message in a
batched dry run:
$ for name in bob alice@exam.ple lisa@exam.ple; do
printf 'mail %s\n~s ubject\nText\n~.\n' "${name}"
done |
LC_ALL=C s-nail -#:x -Smta=test \
-X'alias bob bob@exam.ple'
-. ,
- -end-options
- This flag forces termination of option processing in order to prevent
“option injection” (attacks). It also forcefully puts S-nail
into send mode, see
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
If the setting of expandargv allows their
recognition all mta-option arguments given at the end
of the command line after a ‘-- ’
separator will be passed through to a file-based mta
(Mail-Transfer-Agent) and persist for the entire session.
expandargv constraints do not apply to the content of
mta-arguments. Command line receiver address handling
supports the ‘shquote ’ constraint of
expandaddr, for more please see
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
$ s-nail -#:/ -X 'addrcodec enc Hey, ho <silver@go>' -Xx
S-nail is a direct descendant of BSD Mail, itself a
successor to the Research UNIX mail which “was
there from the start” according to
HISTORY. It thus represents the user side of
the UNIX mail system, whereas the system side
(Mail-Transfer-Agent, MTA) was traditionally taken by
sendmail(8)
(and most MTAs provide a binary of this name for compatibility reasons). If
the [Option]al SMTP mta is included in the
features of S-nail then the system side is not a
mandatory precondition for mail delivery.
S-nail strives for compliance with the POSIX
mailx(1)
standard, but posix, one of the
INTERNAL VARIABLES, or its
ENVIRONMENTal equivalent
POSIXLY_CORRECT , needs to be set to adjust behaviour
to be almost on par. Almost, because there is one important difference:
POSIX Shell-style
argument quoting is ([v15 behaviour may differ] increasingly) used
instead of the Old-style
argument quoting that the standard documents, which is believed to be a
feature. The builtin as well as the (default) global
s-nail.rc
Resource files already bend the
standard imposed settings a bit.
For example, hold and
keepsave are set in order to
suppress the automatic moving of messages to the
secondary mailbox
MBOX that would otherwise occur (see
Message states), and
keep to not remove empty system MBOX mailbox files (or
all empty such files in posix mode) to avoid mangling
of file permissions when files eventually get recreated.
To enter interactive mode even if the initial mailbox is empty
emptystart is set, editheaders
to allow editing of headers as well as fullnames to
not strip down addresses in Compose
mode, and quote to include the message that is
being responded to when reply ing, which is indented
by an indentprefix that also deviates from standard
imposed settings. mime-counter-evidence is fully
enabled, too. It sets followup-to-honour and
reply-to-honour to comply with reply address
desires.
Credentials and other settings are easily addressable by grouping
them via account . The file mode creation mask can be
managed with umask. Files and shell pipe output can be
source d for eval uation, also
during startup from within the Resource
files. Informational context can be available by
set ting verbose or
debug (as via -v ,
-d ).
To send a message to one or more people, using a local or built-in
mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) transport to actually deliver
the generated mail message, S-nail can be invoked with arguments which are the
names of people to whom the mail will be sent, and the command line options
-b and -c can be used to add
(blind) carbon copy receivers:
# Via test MTA
$ echo Hello, world | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s test $LOGNAME
# Via sendmail(1) MTA
$ </dev/null s-nail -:x -s test $LOGNAME
# Debug dry-run mode:
$ </dev/null LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ \
-Sttycharset=utf8 -Sfullnames \
-b bcc@exam.ple -c cc@exam.ple -. \
'(Lovely) Bob <bob@exam.ple>' eric@exam.ple
# With SMTP (no real sending due to -d debug dry-run)
$ LC_ALL=C s-nail -d -:/ -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
-S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=none \
-S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
-a /etc/mail.rc --end-options \
eric@exam.ple < /tmp/letter.txt
Email addresses and plain user names are subject to
alternates filtering, names only are first expanded
through alias and mta-aliases.
An address in angle brackets consisting only of a valid local user
‘<name> ’ will be converted to a
fully qualified address if either hostname is not set,
or set to a non-empty value; if set to the empty value the conversion is
left up to the mta. By setting
expandaddr fine-grained control of recipient address
types other than user names and network addresses is possible. Recipients
are classified as follows: any name that starts with a vertical bar
‘| ’ character specifies a command pipe
– the command string following the
‘| ’ is executed and the message is
sent to its standard input; likewise, any name that consists only of
hyphen-minus ‘- ’ or starts with the
character solidus ‘/ ’ or the character
sequence dot solidus ‘./ ’ is treated
as a file, regardless of the remaining content. Any other name which
contains a commercial at ‘@ ’ character
is a network address; Any other name which starts with a plus sign
‘+ ’ character is a mailbox name; Any
other name which contains a solidus
‘/ ’ character but no exclamation mark
‘! ’ or percent sign
‘% ’ character before is also a mailbox
name; What remains is treated as a network address. This classification can
be avoided by using a ‘Fcc: ’ header,
see Compose mode.
$ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test ./mbox.mbox
$ echo bla | s-nail -Sexpandaddr -s test '|cat >> ./mbox.mbox'
$ echo safe | LC_ALL=C \
s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -Sv15-compat -Sttycharset=utf8 \
--set mime-force-sendout --set fullnames \
-S expandaddr=fail,-all,+addr,failinvaddr -s test \
--end-options 'Imagine John <cold@turk.ey>'
Before messages are sent they undergo editing in
Compose mode. But many settings are
static and can be set more generally. The envelope sender address for
example is defined by from, explicitly defining an
originating hostname may be desirable, especially with
the built-in SMTP Mail-Transfer-Agent mta.
Character sets for outgoing message
and MIME part content are configurable via
sendcharsets, whereas input data is assumed to be in
ttycharset. Message data will be passed over the wire
in a mime-encoding, and MIME parts aka attachments
need a mimetype , usually taken out of
The mime.types files. Saving
copies of sent messages in a record mailbox may be
desirable – as for most mailbox folder
targets Filename
transformations will be performed.
For the purpose of arranging a complete environment of settings
that can be switched to with a single command or command line option there
are account s. Alternatively a flat configuration
could be possible, making use of so-called variable chains which
automatically pick ‘USER@HOST ’ or
‘HOST ’ context-dependent variants some
variables support: for example addressing
‘Folder
pop3://yaa@exam.ple ’ would find
pop3-no-apop-yaa@exam.ple,
pop3-no-apop-exam.ple and
pop3-no-apop in order. For more please see
On URL syntax and
credential lookup and INTERNAL
VARIABLES.
To avoid environmental noise scripts should create a script-local
environment, ideally with the command line options
-: to disable configuration files in conjunction
with repetitions of -S to specify variables:
$ env LC_ALL=C s-nail -:/ \
-Sv15-compat \
-Sttycharset=utf-8 -Smime-force-sendout \
-Sexpandaddr=fail,-all,failinvaddr \
-S mta=smtps://mylogin@exam.ple:465 -Ssmtp-auth=login \
-S from=scriptreply@exam.ple \
-s 'Subject to go' -a attachment_file \
-Sfullnames -. \
'Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>' rec2@exam.ple \
< content_file
As shown, scripts producing messages can “fake” a
locale environment, the above specifies the all-compatible 7-bit clean
LC_ALL “C”, but will nonetheless take
and send UTF-8 in the message text by using
ttycharset. If character set conversion is compiled in
(features includes the term
‘,+iconv, ’) invalid (according to
ttycharset) character input data would normally cause
errors; setting mime-force-sendout will instead, as a
last resort, classify the input as binary data, and therefore allow message
creation to be successful. (Such content can then be inspected either by
installing a pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE handler for
‘application/octet-stream ’, or
possibly automatically through
mime-counter-evidence).
In interactive mode, introduced soon, messages can be sent by
calling the mail command with a list of recipient
addresses:
$ s-nail -:/ -Squiet -Semptystart -Sfullnames -Smta=test
"/var/spool/mail/user": 0 messages
? mail "Recipient 1 <rec1@exam.ple>", rec2@exam.ple
...
? # Will do the right thing (tm)
? m rec1@exam.ple rec2@exam.ple
If standard input is a terminal rather than the message to be sent, the user is
expected to type in the message contents. In compose mode lines beginning with
the character ‘~ ’ (in fact the value of
escape) are special – these are so-called
COMMAND ESCAPES which can be used to
read in files, process shell commands, add and edit attachments and more. For
example ~v or ~e will start
the VISUAL text EDITOR ,
respectively, to revise the message in its current state,
~h allows editing of the most important message
headers, with the potent ~^ custom headers can be
created, for example (more specifically than with -C
and customhdr). [Option]ally ~?
gives an overview of most other available command escapes.
To create file-carbon-copies the special recipient header
‘Fcc: ’ may be used as often as
desired, for example via ~^ . Its entire value (or
body in standard terms) is interpreted as a folder
target, after having been subject to
Filename transformations:
this is the only way to create a file-carbon-copy without introducing an
ambiguity regarding the interpretation of the address, file names with
leading vertical bars or commercial ats can be used. Like all other
recipients ‘Fcc: ’ is subject to the
checks of expandaddr. Any local file and pipe command
addressee honours the setting of mbox-fcc-and-pcc.
Once finished with editing the command escape
~. (see there) will call hooks, insert automatic
injections and receivers, leave compose mode and send the message once it is
completed. Aborting letter composition is possible with either of
~x or ~q , the latter of
which will save the message in the file denoted by
DEAD unless nosave is set. And
unless ignoreeof is set the effect of
~. can also be achieved by typing
end-of-transmission (EOT) via
‘control-D ’
(‘^D ’) at the beginning of an empty
line, and ~q is always reachable by typing
end-of-text (ETX) twice via
‘control-C ’
(‘^C ’).
The compose mode hooks on-compose-enter,
on-compose-splice,
on-compose-leave and
on-compose-cleanup may be set to
define d macros and provide reliable and increasingly
powerful mechanisms to perform automated message adjustments dependent on
message context, for example addition of message signatures
(message-inject-head,
message-inject-tail) or creation of additional
receiver lists (also by setting autocc,
autobcc). To achieve that the command
digmsg may be used in order to query and adjust
status of message(s). The splice hook can also make use of
COMMAND ESCAPES. ([v15 behaviour
may differ] The compose mode hooks work for forward ,
mail , reply and variants;
resend and Resend only
provide the hooks on-resend-enter and
on-resend-cleanup, which are pretty restricted due to
the nature of the operation.)
When invoked without addressees S-nail enters interactive mode in which mails
may be read. When used like that the user's system inbox
(for more on mailbox types please see the command
folder ) is read in and a one line header of each
message therein is displayed if the variable header is
set. The visual style of this summary of headers can
be adjusted through the variable headline and the
possible sorting criterion via autosort. Scrolling
through screenfuls of headers
can be performed with the command z . If the initially
opened mailbox is empty S-nail will instead exit immediately (after displaying
a message) unless the variable emptystart is set.
At the prompt the command
list will give a listing of all available commands
and help will [Option]ally give a summary of some
common ones. If the [Option]al documentation strings are available (see
features) one can type ‘help
X ’ (or ‘?X ’) and see the
actual expansion of ‘X ’ and what its
purpose is, i.e., commands can be abbreviated (note that POSIX defines some
abbreviations, so that the alphabetical order of commands does not
necessarily relate to the abbreviations; it is however possible to define
overwrites with commandalias ). These commands can
also produce a more verbose output.
Messages are given numbers (starting at 1) which uniquely identify
messages; the current message – the “dot” – will
either be the first new message, or the first unread message, or the first
message of the mailbox; the internal variable showlast
will instead cause usage of the last message for this purpose. The command
headers will display a
screenful of header summaries containing the
“dot”, whereas from will display only
the summaries of the given messages, defaulting to the
“dot”.
Message content can be displayed with the command
type (‘t ’,
alias print ). Here the variable
crt controls whether and when S-nail will use the
configured PAGER for display instead of directly
writing to the user terminal screen, the sole
difference to the command more , which will always
use the PAGER . The command
top will instead only show the first
toplines of a message (maybe even compressed if
topsqueeze is set). Message display experience may
improve by setting and adjusting
mime-counter-evidence, and also see
HTML mail and MIME
attachments.
By default the current message (“dot”) is displayed,
but like with many other commands it is possible to give a fancy message
specification (see Specifying
messages), for example ‘t:u ’ will
display all unread messages, ‘t. ’ will
display the “dot”, ‘t 1
5 ’ will type the messages 1 and 5, ‘t
1-5 ’ will type the messages 1 through 5, and
‘t- ’ and
‘t+ ’ will display the previous and the
next message, respectively. The command search (a
more substantial alias for from ) will display a
header summary of the given message specification list instead of their
content; the following will search for subjects:
? from '@Some subject to search
for'
In the default setup all header fields of a message will be
type d, but fields can be white- or blacklisted for a
variety of applications by using the command
headerpick , e.g., to restrict their display to a
very restricted set for type :
‘headerpick
type retain from to cc
subject ’. In order to display all header fields of a
message regardless of currently active ignore or retain lists, use the
commands Type and Top ;
Show will show the raw message content. Note that
historically the global s-nail.rc not only adjusts
the list of displayed headers, but also sets crt.
([v15 behaviour may differ] A yet somewhat restricted) Reliable scriptable
message inspection is available via digmsg .
Dependent upon the configuration a line editor (see the section
On terminal
control and line editor) aims at making the user experience with the
many COMMANDS a bit nicer. When reading
the system inbox, or when -f
(or folder ) specified a mailbox explicitly prefixed
with the special ‘%: ’ modifier (to
propagate it to a primary
system mailbox), then messages which have been read
(see Message states) will be
automatically moved to a secondary
mailbox, the user's MBOX file, when the mailbox
is left, either by changing the active mailbox or by quitting S-nail
– this automatic moving from a system- or primary- to the secondary
mailbox is not performed when the variable hold is
set. Messages can also be explicitly move d to other
mailboxes, whereas copy keeps the original message.
write can be used to write out data content of
specific parts of messages.
After examining a message the user can
reply ‘r ’ to
the sender and all recipients (which will also be placed in
‘To: ’ unless
recipients-in-cc is set), or
Reply ‘R ’
exclusively to the sender(s). To comply with with the receivers desired
reply address the quadoptions
followup-to-honour and
reply-to-honour should usually be set. The commands
Lreply and Lfollowup know
how to apply a special addressee massage, see
Mailing lists. Dependent on the
presence and value of quote the message being replied
to will be included in a quoted form. forward ing a
message will allow editing the new message: the original message will be
contained in the message body, adjusted according to
headerpick . It is possible to
resend or Resend messages:
the former will add a series of
‘Resent- ’ headers, whereas the latter
will not; different to newly created messages editing is not possible and no
copy will be saved even with record unless the
additional variable record-resent is set. When
sending, replying or forwarding messages comments and full names will be
stripped from recipient addresses unless the internal variable
fullnames is set.
Of course messages can be delete
‘d ’, and they can spring into
existence again via undelete , or when the S-nail
session is ended via the exit or
xit commands to perform a quick program termation.
To end a mail processing session regularly and perform a full program exit
one may issue the command quit . It will, among
others, move read messages to the
secondary mailbox
MBOX as necessary, discard deleted messages in the
current mailbox, and update the [Option]al (see
features) line editor
history-file. By the way, whenever the main event loop
is about to look out for the next input line it will trigger the hook
on-main-loop-tick.
HTML-only messages become more and more common, and many messages come bundled
with a bouquet of MIME (Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions) parts and
attachments. To get a notion of MIME types there is a built-in default set,
onto which the content of The
mime.types files will be added (as configured and allowed by
mimetypes-load-control). Types can also become
registered and listed with the command mimetype . To
improve interaction with the faulty MIME part declarations of real life
mime-counter-evidence will allow verification of the
given assertion, and the possible provision of an alternative, better MIME
type. Note plain text parts will always be preferred in
‘multipart/alternative ’ MIME messages
unless mime-alternative-favour-rich is set.
Whereas a simple HTML-to-text filter for displaying HTML messages
is [Option]ally supported (indicated by
‘,+filter-html-tagsoup, ’ in
features), MIME types other than plain text cannot be
handled directly. To deal with specific non-text MIME types or file
extensions programs need to be registered which either prepare
(re-)integrable plain text versions of their input (a mode which is called
copiousoutput ), or display the content externally,
for example in a graphical window: the latter type is only considered by and
for the command mimeview .
To install a handler program for a MIME type an according
pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE variable needs to be set; to define
a handler for a file extension pipe-EXTENSION can be
used – these handlers take precedence. [Option]ally mail user agent
configuration is supported (see The
Mailcap files), and will be queried for display or quote handlers after
the former ones. Type-markers registered via
mimetype are the last possible source for
information how to handle a MIME type.
For example, to display HTML messages integrated via the text
browsers
lynx(1)
or
elinks(1),
register a MathML MIME type and enable its plain text display, and to open
PDF attachments in an external PDF viewer, asynchronously and with some
other magic attached:
? if "$features" !% ,+filter-html-tagsoup,
? #set pipe-text/html='?* elinks -force-html -dump 1'
? set pipe-text/html='?* lynx -stdin -dump -force_html'
? # Display HTML as plain text instead
? #set pipe-text/html=?t
? endif
? mimetype ?t application/mathml+xml mathml
? wysh set pipe-application/pdf='?&=? \
trap "rm -f \"${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}\"" EXIT;\
trap "trap \"\" INT QUIT TERM; exit 1" INT QUIT TERM;\
mupdf "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}"'
? define showhtml {
? \localopts yes
? \set mime-alternative-favour-rich pipe-text/html=?h?
? \type "$@"
? }
? \commandalias html \\call showhtml
Known or subscribed-to mailing lists may be flagged in the summary of
headers (headline format
character ‘%L ’), and will gain special
treatment when sending mails: the variable
followup-to-honour will ensure that a
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ header is honoured
when a message is being replied to (reply ,
followup , Lreply ,
Lfollowup ), and followup-to
controls creation of this header when creating mail s,
if the necessary user setup (from, sender); is available; then, it may also be
created automatically, for example when list-replying via
Lreply or Lfollowup , when
followup or reply is used and
the messages ‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ is
honoured etc.
The commands mlist and
mlsubscribe manage S-nails notion of which addresses
are mailing lists. With the [Option]al regular expression support any
address which contains any of the magic regular expression characters
(‘^[*+?|$ ’; see
re_format(7)
or
regex(7),
dependent on the host system) will be compiled and used as one, possibly
matching many addresses. It is not possible to escape the
“magic”: in order to match special characters as-is, bracket
expressions must be used, for example
‘search
@subject@'[[]open bracket' ’.
? set followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes \
reply-to-honour=ask-yes
? mlist a1@b1.c1 a2@b2.c2 '.*@lists\.c3$'
? mlsubscribe a4@b4.c4 exact@lists.c3
Known and subscribed lists differ in that for the latter the
users address is not part of a generated
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’. There are
exceptions, for example if multiple lists are addressed and not all have the
subscription attribute. When replying to a message its list address
(‘List-Post: ’ header) is automatically
and temporarily treated like a known mlist ;
dependent on the variable reply-to-honour an existing
‘Reply-To: ’ is used instead (if it is
a single address on the same domain as
‘List-Post: ’) in order to accept a
list administrator's wish that is supposed to have been manifested like
that.
For convenience and compatibility with mail programs that do not
honour the non-standard M-F-T, an automatic user entry in the carbon-copy
‘Cc: ’ address list of generated
message can be created by setting followup-to-add-cc.
This entry will be added whenever the user will be placed in the
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ list, and is not a
regular addressee already. reply-to-swap-in tries to
deal with the address rewriting that many mailing-lists nowadays perform to
work around DKIM / DMARC etc. standard imposed problems.
[Option] S/MIME provides two central mechanisms: message signing and message
encryption. A signed message contains some data in addition to the regular
text. The data can be used to verify that the message has been sent using a
valid certificate, that the sender address matches that in the certificate,
and that the message text has not been altered. Signing a message does not
change its regular text; it can be read regardless of whether the recipients
software is able to handle S/MIME. It is thus usually possible to sign all
outgoing messages if so desired.
Encryption, in contrast, makes the message text invisible for all
people except those who have access to the secret decryption key. To encrypt
a message, the specific recipients public encryption key must be known. It
is therefore not possible to send encrypted mail to people unless their key
has been retrieved from either previous communication or public key
directories. Because signing is performed with private keys, and encryption
with public keys, messages should always be signed before being
encrypted.
A central concept to S/MIME is that of the certification authority
(CA). A CA is a trusted institution that issues certificates. For each of
these certificates it can be verified that it really originates from the CA,
provided that the CA's own certificate is previously known. A set of CA
certificates is usually delivered and installed together with the
cryptographical library that is used on the local system. Therefore
reasonable security for S/MIME on the Internet is provided if the source
that provides that library installation is trusted. It is also possible to
use a specific pool of trusted certificates. If this is desired,
smime-ca-no-defaults should be set to avoid using the
default certificate pool, and smime-ca-file and/or
smime-ca-dir should be pointed to a trusted pool of
certificates. A certificate cannot be more secure than the method its CA
certificate has been retrieved with.
This trusted pool of certificates is used by the command
verify to ensure that the given S/MIME messages can
be trusted. If so, verified sender certificates that were embedded in signed
messages can be saved locally with the command
certsave , and used by S-nail to encrypt further
communication with these senders:
? certsave FILENAME
? set smime-encrypt-USER@HOST=FILENAME \
smime-cipher-USER@HOST=AES256
To sign outgoing messages, in order to allow receivers to verify
the origin of these messages, a personal S/MIME certificate is required.
S-nail supports password-protected personal certificates (and keys), see
smime-sign-cert. The section
On URL syntax and
credential lookup gives an overview of the possible sources of user
credentials, and S/MIME step by
step shows examplarily how a private S/MIME certificate can be obtained.
In general, if such a private key plus certificate “pair” is
available, all that needs to be done is to set some variables:
? set smime-sign-cert=ME@exam.ple.paired \
smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
smime-sign from=myname@my.host
Variables of interest for S/MIME in general are
smime-ca-dir, smime-ca-file,
smime-ca-flags,
smime-ca-no-defaults,
smime-crl-dir, smime-crl-file.
For S/MIME signing of interest are smime-sign,
smime-sign-cert,
smime-sign-include-certs and
smime-sign-digest. Additional variables of interest
for S/MIME en- and decryption: smime-cipher and
smime-encrypt-USER@HOST. Variables of secondary
interest may be content-description-smime-message and
content-description-smime-signature. S/MIME is
available if ‘,+smime, ’ is included in
features.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Note that neither S/MIME signing nor
encryption applies to message subjects or other header fields yet. Thus they
may not contain sensitive information for encrypted messages, and cannot be
trusted even if the message content has been verified. When sending signed
messages, it is recommended to repeat any important header information in
the message text.
For accessing protocol-specific resources Uniform Resource Locators (URL, RFC
3986) have become omnipresent. Here they are expected in a
“normalized” variant, not used in data exchange, but only meant
as a compact, easy-to-use way of defining and representing information in a
well-known notation; as such they do not conform to any real standard.
Optional parts are placed in brackets
‘[] ’, optional either because there also
exist other ways to define the information, or because the part is protocol
specific. ‘/path ’ for example is used by
the [Option]al Maildir folder type and the IMAP
protocol, but not by POP3. If ‘USER ’ and
‘PASSWORD ’ are included in an URL server
specification, URL percent encoded (RFC 3986) forms are needed, generable with
urlcodec .
PROTOCOL://[USER[:PASSWORD]@]server[:port][/path]
Often INTERNAL
VARIABLES exist in multiple versions, called “variable
chains” in this document: the plain
‘variable ’ as well as
‘variable-HOST ’ and
‘variable-USER@HOST ’. If a port was
specified ‘HOST ’ really means
‘server:port ’, not
‘server ’. And this
‘USER ’ is never in URL percent encoded
form. For example, whether the hypothetical
‘smtp://wings%3Aof@a.dove ’ including
user and password was used, or whether it was
‘smtp://a.dove ’ and it came from a
different source, to lookup the chain tls-config-pairs
first
‘tls-config-pairs-wings:of@a.dove ’ is
looked up, then
‘tls-config-pairs-a.dove ’, before
finally looking up the plain variable.
The logic to collect (an account s)
credential information is as follows:
- A user is always required. If no
‘
USER ’ has been given in the URL the
variables user-HOST and user
are looked up. Afterwards, when enforced by the [Option]al variables
netrc-lookup-HOST or
netrc-lookup,
The .netrc file of the user will
be searched for a ‘HOST ’ specific
entry which provides a ‘login ’ name:
only unambiguous entries are used (one possible matching entry for
‘HOST ’).
If there is still no
‘USER ’ then the verified
LOGNAME , known to be a valid user on the current
host, is used.
- Authentication: unless otherwise noted the chain
PROTOCOL-auth-USER@HOST,
PROTOCOL-auth-HOST,
PROTOCOL-auth is checked, falling back to a
protocol-specific default as necessary.
- If no ‘
PASSWORD ’ has been given in
the URL, then if the ‘USER ’ has been
found through the [Option]al netrc-lookup, that may
have also provided the password. Otherwise the chain
password-USER@HOST,
password-HOST, password is
looked up.
Thereafter the (now complete) [Option]al chain
netrc-lookup-USER@HOST,
netrc-lookup-HOST,
netrc-lookup is checked, if set the
netrc cache is searched for a password only
(multiple user accounts for a single machine may exist as well as a
fallback entry without user but with a password).
If at that point there is still no password available, but the
(protocols') chosen authentication type requires a password, then in
interactive mode the user will be prompted on the terminal.
Note: S/MIME verification works relative to the
values found in the ‘From: ’ (or
‘Sender: ’) header field(s), which
means the values of smime-sign,
smime-sign-cert,
smime-sign-include-certs and
smime-sign-digest will not be looked up using the
‘USER ’ and
‘HOST ’ chains from above, but instead
use the corresponding values from the message that is being worked on. If no
address matches we assume and use the setting of from.
In unusual cases multiple and different
‘USER ’ and
‘HOST ’ combinations may therefore be
involved – on the other hand those unusual cases become possible. The
usual case is as short as:
set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@HOST smtp-use-starttls \
smime-sign smime-sign-cert=+smime.pair \
from=myname@my.host
The section EXAMPLES contains
complete example configurations.
[Option] SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) aka its successor TLS (Transport Layer
Security) are protocols which aid in securing communication by providing a
safely initiated and encrypted network connection. A central concept of TLS
are certificates: as part of each network connection setup a (set of)
certificates will be exchanged through which the identity of the network peer
can be cryptographically verified; if possible the TLS/SNI
(ServerNameIndication) extension will be enabled to allow servers fine-grained
control over the certificates being used. A locally installed pool of trusted
certificates will then be inspected, and verification will succeed if it
contains a(n in)direct signer of the presented certificate(s).
The local pool of trusted so-called CA (Certification Authority)
certificates is usually delivered with and used along the TLS library. A
custom pool of trusted certificates can be selected by pointing
tls-ca-file and/or (with special preparation)
tls-ca-dir to the desired location; setting
tls-ca-no-defaults in addition will avoid additional
inspection of the default pool. A certificate cannot be more secure than the
method its CA certificate has been retrieved with. For inspection or other
purposes, the certificate of a server (as seen when connecting to it) can be
fetched with the command tls (port can usually be
the protocol name, too, and tls-verify is taken into
account here):
$ s-nail -vX 'tls certchain SERVER-URL[:PORT]; x'
A local pool of CA certificates is not strictly necessary,
however, server certificates can also be verified via their fingerprint. For
this a message digest will be calculated and compared against the variable
chain tls-fingerprint, and verification will succeed
if the fingerprint matches. The message digest (algorithm) can be configured
via the variable chain tls-fingerprint-digest;
tls can again be used:
$ s-nail -X 'wysh set verbose; tls fingerprint SERVER-URL[:PORT]; x'
It depends on the used protocol whether encrypted communication is
possible, and which configuration steps have to be taken to enable it. Some
protocols, like POP3S, are implicitly encrypted, others, like POP3, can
upgrade a plain text connection if so requested. For example, to use the
‘STLS ’ that POP3 offers (a member of)
the variable (chain) pop3-use-starttls needs to be
set, with convenience via shortcut :
shortcut encpop1 pop3s://pop1.exam.ple
shortcut encpop2 pop3://pop2.exam.ple
set pop3-use-starttls-pop2.exam.ple
set mta=smtps://smtp.exam.ple:465
set mta=smtp://smtp.exam.ple smtp-use-starttls
Normally that is all there is to do, given that TLS libraries try
to provide safe defaults, plenty of knobs however exist to adjust settings.
For example certificate verification settings can be fine-tuned via
tls-ca-flags, and the TLS configuration basics are
accessible via tls-config-pairs, for example to
control protocol versions or cipher lists. In the past hints on how to
restrict the set of protocols to highly secure ones were indicated, but as
of the time of this writing the list of protocols or ciphers may need to
become relaxed in order to be able to connect to some servers; the following
example allows connecting to a “Lion” that uses OpenSSL
0.9.8za from June 2014 (refer to
INTERNAL VARIABLES for more on
variable chains):
wysh set tls-config-pairs-lion@exam.ple='MinProtocol=TLSv1.1,\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:\
ECDHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-SHA:\
DHE-RSA-AES256-SHA:@STRENGTH'
The OpenSSL program
ciphers(1)
should be referred to when creating a custom cipher list. Variables of
interest for TLS in general are tls-ca-dir,
tls-ca-file, tls-ca-flags,
tls-ca-no-defaults,
tls-config-file,
tls-config-module,
tls-config-pairs, tls-crl-dir,
tls-crl-file, tls-rand-file as
well as tls-verify. Also see
tls-features. TLS is available if
‘+tls ’ is included in
features.
[Option] The user's locale environment is detected by looking at the
LC_ALL environment variable. The internal variable
ttycharset will be set to the detected terminal
character set accordingly, and will thus show up in the output of commands
like set and varshow . This
character set will be targeted when trying to display data, and user input
data is expected to be in this character set, too.
When creating messages their character input data is classified.
7-bit clean text data and attachments will be classified as
charset-7bit. 8-bit data will [Option]ally be
converted into members of sendcharsets until a
character set conversion succeeds. charset-8bit is the
implied default last member of this list. If no 8-bit character set is
capable to represent input data, no message will be sent, and its text will
optionally be saved in DEAD .
If that is not acceptable, for example in script environments,
mime-force-sendout can be set to force sending of
non-convertible data as
‘application/octet-stream ’ classified
binary content instead: like this receivers still have the option to inspect
message content (for example via
mime-counter-evidence). If the [Option]al character
set conversion is not available (features misses
‘,+iconv, ’),
ttycharset is the only supported character set for non
7-bit clean data, and it is simply assumed it can be used to exchange 8-bit
messages.
ttycharset may also be given an explicit
value to send mail in a completely “faked” locale environment,
which can be used to generate and send for example 8-bit UTF-8 input data in
a pure 7-bit US-ASCII ‘LC_ALL=C ’
environment (an example of this can be found in the section
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode). Due to lack of programming interfaces
reading mail will not really work as expected in a faked environment:
whereas ttycharset might be addressable, any output
will be made safely printable, as via vexpr
makeprint , according to the actual locale
environment, which is not affected by ttycharset.
Classifying 7-bit clean data as charset-7bit
is a problem if the input character set (ttycharset)
is a multibyte character set that is itself 7-bit clean. For example, the
Japanese character set ISO-2022-JP is, but is capable to encode the rich set
of Japanese Kanji, Hiragana and Katakana characters: in order to notify
receivers of this character set the mail message must be MIME encoded so
that the character set ISO-2022-JP can be advertised, otherwise an invalid
email message would result! To achieve this, the variable
charset-7bit can be set to ISO-2022-JP. (Today a
better approach regarding email is the usage of UTF-8, which uses 8-bit
bytes for non-US-ASCII data.)
When replying to a message and the variable
reply-in-same-charset is set, the character set of the
message being replied to is tried first as a target character set (still
being a subject of charsetalias filtering, however).
Another opportunity is sendcharsets-else-ttycharset to
reflect the user's locale environment automatically, it will treat
ttycharset as an implied member of (an unset)
sendcharsets.
[Option] When reading messages, their text data is converted into
ttycharset as necessary in order to display them on
the user's terminal. Unprintable characters and invalid byte sequences are
detected and replaced by substitution characters. Character set mappings for
source character sets can be established with
charsetalias , which may be handy to work around
faulty or incomplete character set catalogues (one could for example add a
missing LATIN1 to ISO-8859-1 mapping), or to enforce treatment of one
character set as another one (“interpret LATIN1 as CP1252”).
Also see charset-unknown-8bit to deal with another
hairy aspect of message interpretation.
In general, if a message saying “cannot convert from a to
b” appears, either some characters are not appropriate for the
currently selected (terminal) character set, or the needed conversion is not
supported by the system. In the first case, it is necessary to set an
appropriate LC_CTYPE locale and/or the variable
ttycharset. The best results are usually achieved when
running in a UTF-8 locale on a UTF-8 capable terminal, in which case the
full Unicode spectrum of characters is available. In this setup characters
from various countries can be displayed, while it is still possible to use
more simple character sets for sending to retain maximum compatibility with
older mail clients.
On the other hand the POSIX standard defines a locale-independent
7-bit “portable character set” that should be used when
overall portability is an issue, the even more restricted subset named
“portable filename character set” consists of A-Z, a-z, 0-9,
period ‘. ’, underscore
‘_ ’ and hyphen-minus
‘- ’.
S-nail differentiates in between several message states; the current state will
be reflected in the summary of headers if the
attrlist of the configured
headline allows, and
Specifying messages dependent on
their state is possible. When operating on the system
inbox, or in any other
primary system mailbox,
special actions, like the automatic moving of messages to the
secondary mailbox
MBOX , may be applied when the mailbox is left (also
implicitly by program termination, unless the command
exit was used) – however, because this may be
irritating to users which are used to “more modern”
mail-user-agents, the provided global s-nail.rc
template sets the internal hold and
keepsave variables in order to suppress this behaviour.
- ‘
new ’
- Message has neither been viewed nor moved to any other state. Such
messages are retained even in the
primary system
mailbox.
- ‘
unread ’
- Message has neither been viewed nor moved to any other state, but the
message was present already when the mailbox has been opened last: Such
messages are retained even in the
primary system
mailbox.
- ‘
read ’
- The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
~f , ~m ,
~F , ~M ,
copy , mbox ,
next , pipe ,
Print , print ,
top , Type ,
type , undelete . The
commands dp and dt will
always try to automatically “step” and
type the “next” logical message, and
may thus mark multiple messages as read, the
delete command will do so if the internal variable
autoprint is set.
Except when the exit command is used,
messages that are in a
primary system mailbox
and are in ‘read ’ state when the
mailbox is left will be saved in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX unless the internal variable
hold it set.
- ‘
deleted ’
- The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
delete , dp ,
dt . Only undelete can be
used to access such messages.
- ‘
preserved ’
- The message has been processed by a
preserve
command and it will be retained in its current location.
- ‘
saved ’
- The message has been processed by one of the following commands:
save or write . Unless when
the exit command is used, messages that are in a
primary system mailbox
and are in ‘saved ’ state when the
mailbox is left will be deleted; they will be saved in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX when the internal variable
keepsave is set.
In addition to these message states, flags which otherwise have no
technical meaning in the mail system except allowing special ways of
addressing them when Specifying
messages can be set on messages. These flags are saved with messages and
are thus persistent, and are portable between a set of widely used MUAs.
answered
- Mark messages as having been answered.
draft
- Mark messages as being a draft.
flag
- Mark messages which need special attention.
[Only new quoting rules] COMMANDS which take
Message list arguments, such
as search , type ,
copy , and delete , can perform
actions on a number of messages at once. Specifying invalid messages, or using
illegal syntax, will cause errors to be reported through the
INTERNAL VARIABLES
!, ^ERR and companions, as well as
the command exit status ?.
For example, ‘delete 1 2 ’
deletes the messages 1 and 2, whereas ‘delete
1-5 ’ will delete the messages 1 through 5. In sorted or
threaded mode (see the sort command),
‘delete 1-5 ’ will delete the messages
that are located between (and including) messages 1 through 5 in the
sorted/threaded order, as shown in the headers
summary.
Errors can for example be ^ERR-BADMSG when
requesting an invalid message, ^ERR-NOMSG if no
applicable message can be found, ^ERR-CANCELED for
missing informational data (mostly thread-related).
^ERR-INVAL for invalid syntax as well as
^ERR-IO for input/output errors can happen. The
following special message names exist:
- .
- The current message, the so-called “dot”.
- ;
- The message that was previously the current message; needs to be
quoted.
- ,
- The parent message of the current message, that is the message with the
Message-ID given in the
‘
In-Reply-To: ’ field or the last
entry of the ‘References: ’ field of
the current message.
- -
- The previous undeleted message, or the previous deleted message for the
undelete command; In
sort ed or
‘thread ’ed mode, the previous such
message in the according order.
- +
- The next undeleted message, or the next deleted message for the
undelete command; In
sort ed or
‘thread ’ed mode, the next such
message in the according order.
- ^
- The first undeleted message, or the first deleted message for the
undelete command; In
sort ed or
‘thread ’ed mode, the first such
message in the according order.
- $
- The last message; In
sort ed or
‘thread ’ed mode, the last such
message in the according order. Needs to be quoted.
- &x
- In ‘
thread ’ed
sort mode, selects the message addressed with
x, where x is any other
message specification, and all messages from the thread that begins at it.
Otherwise it is identical to x. If
x is omitted, the thread beginning with the current
message is selected.
- *
- All messages.
- `
- All messages that were included in the
Message list arguments of
the previous command; needs to be quoted. (A convenient way to read all
new messages is to select them via ‘
from
:n ’, as below, and then to read them in order with the
default command — next — simply by
successively typing ‘` ’; for this to
work showlast must be set.)
- x-y
- An inclusive range of message numbers. Selectors that may also be used as
endpoints include any of .;-+^$.
- address
- A case-insensitive “any substring matches” search against
the ‘
From: ’ header, which will match
addresses (too) even if showname is set (and POSIX
says “any address as shown in a header summary shall be matchable
in this form”); However, if the allnet
variable is set, only the local part of the address is evaluated for the
comparison, not ignoring case, and the setting of
showname is completely ignored. For finer control
and match boundaries use the ‘@ ’
search expression.
- /string
- All messages that contain string in the subject
field (case ignored according to locale). See also the
searchheaders variable. If
string is empty, the string from the previous
specification of that type is used again.
- [@name-list]@expr
- All messages that contain the given case-insensitive search
expression; If the [Option]al regular expression
support is available expr will be interpreted as (an
extended) one if any of the
magic regular
expression characters is seen. If the optional
@name-list part is missing the
search is restricted to the subject field body, but otherwise
name-list specifies a comma-separated list of header
fields to search, for example
'@to,from,cc@Someone i ought to
know'
In order to search for a string that includes a
‘@ ’ (commercial at) character the
name-list is effectively non-optional, but may be
given as the empty string. Also, specifying an empty search
expression will effectively test for existence of
the given header fields. Some special header fields may be abbreviated:
‘f ’,
‘t ’,
‘c ’,
‘b ’ and
‘s ’ will match
‘From ’,
‘To ’,
‘Cc ’,
‘Bcc ’ and
‘Subject ’, respectively and
case-insensitively. [Option]ally, and just like
expr, name-list will be
interpreted as (an extended) regular expression if any of the
magic regular
expression characters is seen.
The special names
‘header ’ or
‘< ’ can be used to search in
(all of) the header(s) of the message, and the special names
‘body ’ or
‘> ’ and
‘text ’ or
‘= ’ will perform full text
searches – whereas the former searches only the body, the latter
also searches the message header ([v15 behaviour may differ] this mode
yet brute force searches over the entire decoded content of messages,
including administrativa strings).
This specification performs full text comparison, but even
with regular expression support it is almost impossible to write a
search expression that safely matches only a specific address domain. To
request that the body content of the header is treated as a list of
addresses, and to strip those down to the plain email address which the
search expression is to be matched against, prefix the effective
name-list with a tilde
‘~ ’:
'@~f,c@@a\.safe\.domain\.match$'
- :c
- All messages of state or with matching condition
‘
c ’, where
‘c ’ is one or multiple of the
following colon modifiers:
- a
answered
messages (cf. the variable markanswered).
- d
- ‘
deleted ’ messages (for the
undelete and from
commands only).
- f
flag ged
messages.
- L
- Messages with receivers that match
mlsubscribe d addresses.
- l
- Messages with receivers that match
mlist ed
addresses.
- n
- ‘
new ’ messages.
- o
- Old messages (any not in state
‘
read ’ or
‘new ’).
- r
- ‘
read ’ messages.
- S
- [Option] Messages with unsure spam classification (see
Handling spam).
- s
- [Option] Messages classified as spam.
- t
- Messages marked as
draft .
- u
- ‘
unread ’ messages.
[Option] IMAP-style SEARCH expressions may also be used. These
consist of keywords and criterions, and because
Message list arguments are
split into tokens according to
Shell-style argument
quoting it is necessary to quote the entire IMAP search expression in
order to ensure that it remains a single token. This addressing mode is
available with all types of mailbox folder s; S-nail
will perform the search locally as necessary. Strings must be enclosed by
double quotation marks ‘" ’ in
their entirety if they contain whitespace or parentheses; within the quotes,
only reverse solidus ‘\ ’ is recognized
as an escape character. All string searches are case-insensitive. When the
description indicates that the “envelope” representation of an
address field is used, this means that the search string is checked against
both a list constructed as
'("name" "source" "local-part" "domain-part")'
for each address, and the addresses without real names from the
respective header field. These search expressions can be nested using
parentheses, see below for examples.
- (criterion)
- All messages that satisfy the given criterion.
- (criterion1 criterion2 ... criterionN)
- All messages that satisfy all of the given criteria.
- (or criterion1 criterion2)
- All messages that satisfy either criterion1 or
criterion2, or both. To connect more than two
criteria using ‘
or ’ specifications
have to be nested using additional parentheses, as with
‘(or a (or b c)) ’, since
‘(or a b c) ’ really means
‘((a or b) and c) ’. For a simple
‘or ’ operation of independent
criteria on the lowest nesting level, it is possible to achieve similar
effects by using three separate criteria, as with
‘(a) (b) (c) ’.
- (not criterion)
- All messages that do not satisfy criterion.
- (bcc
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the envelope
representation of the ‘
Bcc: ’
field.
- (cc
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the envelope
representation of the ‘
Cc: ’
field.
- (from
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the envelope
representation of the ‘
From: ’
field.
- (subject
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the
‘
Subject: ’ field.
- (to
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the envelope
representation of the ‘
To: ’
field.
- (header name
"string")
- All messages that contain string in the specified
‘
Name: ’ field.
- (body
"string")
- All messages that contain string in their body.
- (text
"string")
- All messages that contain string in their header or
body.
- (larger size)
- All messages that are larger than size (in
bytes).
- (smaller size)
- All messages that are smaller than size (in
bytes).
- (before date)
- All messages that were received before date, which
must be in the form ‘
d[d]-mon-yyyy ’,
where ‘d ’ denotes the day of the
month as one or two digits, ‘mon ’ is
the name of the month – one of ‘Jan Feb Mar
Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec ’, and
‘yyyy ’ is the year as four digits,
for example ‘28-Dec-2012 ’.
- (on date)
- All messages that were received on the specified date.
- (since date)
- All messages that were received since the specified date.
- (sentbefore date)
- All messages that were sent on the specified date.
- (senton date)
- All messages that were sent on the specified date.
- (sentsince date)
- All messages that were sent since the specified date.
- ()
- The same criterion as for the previous search. This specification cannot
be used as part of another criterion. If the previous command line
contained more than one independent criterion then the last of those
criteria is used.
[Option] Terminal control through one of the standard
UNIX libraries, Termcap Access
Library (libtermcap, -ltermcap) or Terminal
Information Library (libterminfo, -lterminfo), may be available. For
the TERM inal defined in the environment interactive
usage aspects, for example Coloured
display, and insight of cursor and function keys for the Mailx-Line-Editor
(MLE), will be enhanced or enabled. Library interaction can be disabled on a
per-invocation basis via termcap-disable, whereas the
internal variable termcap is always used as a preferred
source of terminal capabilities. (For a usage example see the
FAQ entry
Not
"defunctional", but the editor key does not work.)
[Option] The built-in Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE) should work in all
environments which comply to the ISO C standard ISO/IEC
9899/AMD1:1995 (“ISO C90, Amendment 1”), and
will support wide glyphs if possible (the necessary functionality had been
removed from ISO C, but was included in X/Open Portability
Guide Issue 4 (“XPG4”)). Usage of a line editor
in interactive mode can be prevented by setting
line-editor-disable. Especially if the [Option]al
terminal control support is missing setting entries in
termcap will help shall the MLE misbehave, see there
for more. The MLE can support a little bit of
colour .
[Option] If the history feature is
available then input from line editor prompts will be saved in a history
list that can be searched in and be expanded from. Such saving can be
prevented by prefixing input with any amount of whitespace. Aspects of
history, like allowed content and maximum size, as well as whether history
shall be saved persistently, can be configured with the internal variables
history-file, history-gabby,
history-gabby-persist and
history-size. There also exists the macro hook
on-history-addition which can be used to apply finer
control on what enters history.
The MLE supports a set of editing and control commands. By default
(as) many (as possible) of these will be assigned to a set of single-letter
control codes, which should work on any terminal (and can be generated by
holding the “control” key while pressing the key of desire,
for example ‘control-D ’). If the
[Option]al bind command is available then the MLE
commands can also be accessed freely by assigning the command name, which is
shown in parenthesis in the list below, to any desired key-sequence, and the
MLE will instead and also use bind to establish its
built-in key bindings (more of them if the [Option]al terminal control is
available), an action which can then be suppressed completely by setting
line-editor-no-defaults.
Shell-style argument
quoting notation is used in the following:
- ‘
\cA ’
- Go to the start of the line (
mle-go-home ).
- ‘
\cB ’
- Move the cursor backward one character
(
mle-go-bwd ).
- ‘
\cC ’
- raise(3)
‘
SIGINT ’
(mle-raise-int ).
- ‘
\cD ’
- Forward delete the character under the cursor; quits S-nail if used on the
empty line unless the internal variable ignoreeof is
set (
mle-del-fwd ).
- ‘
\cE ’
- Go to the end of the line (
mle-go-end ).
- ‘
\cF ’
- Move the cursor forward one character
(
mle-go-fwd ).
- ‘
\cG ’
- Cancel current operation, full reset. If there is an active history search
or tabulator expansion then this command will first reset that, reverting
to the former line content; thus a second reset is needed for a full reset
in this case (
mle-reset ).
- ‘
\cH ’
- Backspace: backward delete one character
(
mle-del-bwd ).
- ‘
\cI ’
- [Only new quoting rules] Horizontal tabulator: try to expand the word
before the cursor, supporting the usual
Filename
transformations (
mle-complete ; this is
affected by mle-quote-rndtrip and
line-editor-cpl-word-breaks).
- ‘
\cJ ’
- Newline: commit the current line
(
mle-commit ).
- ‘
\cK ’
- Cut all characters from the cursor to the end of the line
(
mle-snarf-end ).
- ‘
\cL ’
- Repaint the line (
mle-repaint ).
- ‘
\cN ’
- [Option] Go to the next history entry
(
mle-hist-fwd ).
- ‘
\cO ’
- ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command
dt .
- ‘
\cP ’
- [Option] Go to the previous history entry
(
mle-hist-bwd ).
- ‘
\cQ ’
- Toggle roundtrip mode shell quotes, where produced, on and off
(
mle-quote-rndtrip ). This setting is temporary,
and will be forgotten once the command line is committed; also see
shcodec .
- ‘
\cR ’
- [Option] Complete the current line from (the remaining) older history
entries (
mle-hist-srch-bwd ).
- ‘
\cS ’
- [Option] Complete the current line from (the remaining) newer history
entries (
mle-hist-srch-fwd ).
- ‘
\cT ’
- Paste the snarf buffer (
mle-paste ).
- ‘
\cU ’
- The same as ‘
\cA ’ followed by
‘\cK ’
(mle-snarf-line ).
- ‘
\cV ’
- Prompts for a Unicode character (hexadecimal number without prefix, see
vexpr ) to be inserted
(mle-prompt-char ). Note this command needs to be
assigned to a single-letter control code in order to become recognized and
executed during input of a key-sequence (only three single-letter control
codes can be used for that shortcut purpose); this control code is then
special-treated and thus cannot be part of any other sequence (because it
will trigger the mle-prompt-char function
immediately).
- ‘
\cW ’
- Cut the characters from the one preceding the cursor to the preceding word
boundary (
mle-snarf-word-bwd ).
- ‘
\cX ’
- Move the cursor forward one word boundary
(
mle-go-word-fwd ).
- ‘
\cY ’
- Move the cursor backward one word boundary
(
mle-go-word-bwd ).
- ‘
\cZ ’
- raise(3)
‘
SIGTSTP ’
(mle-raise-tstp ).
- ‘
\c[ ’
- Escape: reset a possibly used multibyte character input state machine and
[Option]ally a lingering, incomplete key binding
(
mle-cancel ). This command needs to be assigned to
a single-letter control code in order to become recognized and executed
during input of a key-sequence (only three single-letter control codes can
be used for that shortcut purpose). This control code may also be part of
a multi-byte sequence, but if a sequence is active and the very control
code is currently also an expected input, then the active sequence takes
precedence and will consume the control code.
- ‘
\c\ ’
- ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command
‘
z + ’.
- ‘
\c] ’
- ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command
‘
z $ ’.
- ‘
\c^ ’
- ([Option]ally context-dependent) Invokes the command
‘
z 0 ’.
- ‘
\c_ ’
- Cut the characters from the one after the cursor to the succeeding word
boundary (
mle-snarf-word-fwd ).
- ‘
\c? ’
- Backspace:
mle-del-bwd .
- –
mle-bell : ring the audible bell.
- –
- [Option]
mle-clear-screen : move the cursor home
and clear the screen.
- –
mle-fullreset : different to
mle-reset this will immediately reset a possibly
active search etc.
- –
mle-go-screen-bwd : move the cursor backward one
screen width.
- –
mle-go-screen-fwd : move the cursor forward one
screen width.
- –
mle-raise-quit:
raise(3)
‘SIGQUIT ’.
[Option] Colours and font attributes through ANSI a.k.a. ISO 6429 SGR (select
graphic rendition) escape sequences are optionally supported. Usage of colours
and font attributes solely depends upon the capability of the detected
terminal type (TERM ), and as fine-tuned through
termcap. Colours and font attributes can be managed with
the multiplexer command colour , and
uncolour removes the given mappings. Setting
colour-disable suppresses usage of colour and font
attribute sequences, while leaving established mappings unchanged.
Whether actually applicable colour and font attribute sequences
should also be generated when output is going to be paged through the
external PAGER (also see crt)
depends upon the setting of colour-pager, because
pagers usually need to be configured in order to support ISO escape
sequences. Knowledge of some widely used pagers is however built-in, and in
a clean environment it is often enough to simply set
colour-pager; please refer to that variable for more
on this topic.
It might make sense to conditionalize colour setup on interactive
mode via if
(‘terminal ’ indeed means
“interactive”):
if terminal && "$features" =% ,+colour,
colour iso view-msginfo ft=bold,fg=green
colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=red (from|subject) # regex
colour iso view-header fg=red
uncolour iso view-header from,subject
colour iso view-header ft=bold,fg=magenta,bg=cyan
colour 256 view-header ft=bold,fg=208,bg=230 "subject,from"
colour mono view-header ft=bold
colour mono view-header ft=bold,ft=reverse subject,from
endif
[Option] S-nail can make use of several spam interfaces for the purpose of
identification of, and, in general, dealing with spam messages. A precondition
of most commands in order to function is that the
spam-interface variable is set to one of the supported
interfaces. Specifying messages
that have been identified as spam is possible via their (volatile)
‘is-spam ’ state by using the
‘:s ’ and
‘:S ’
specifications, and their attrlist entries will be used
when displaying the headline in the summary of
headers .
spamrate
rates the given messages and sets their
‘is-spam ’ flag accordingly. If the
spam interface offers spam scores these can be shown in
headline by using the format
‘%$ ’.
spamham ,
spamspam and spamforget
will interact with the Bayesian filter of the chosen interface and learn
the given messages as “ham” or “spam”,
respectively; the last command can be used to cause
“unlearning” of messages; it adheres to their current
‘is-spam ’ state and thus reverts
previous teachings.
spamclear
and spamset will simply set and clear,
respectively, the mentioned volatile
‘is-spam ’ message flag, without any
interface interaction.
The
spamassassin(1)
based spam-interface
‘spamc ’ requires a running instance of
the
spamd(1)
server in order to function, started with the option
--allow-tell shall Bayesian filter learning be
possible.
$ spamd -i localhost:2142 -i /tmp/.spamsock -d [-L] [-l]
$ spamd --listen=localhost:2142 --listen=/tmp/.spamsock \
--daemonize [--local] [--allow-tell]
Thereafter S-nail can make use of these interfaces:
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
-Sspamc-arguments="-U /tmp/.spamsock" -Sspamc-user=
or
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=spamc -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamc-command=/usr/local/bin/spamc \
-Sspamc-arguments="-d localhost -p 2142" -Sspamc-user=
Using the generic filter approach allows usage of programs like
bogofilter(1).
Here is an example, requiring it to be accessible via
PATH :
$ s-nail -Sspam-interface=filter -Sspam-maxsize=500000 \
-Sspamfilter-ham="bogofilter -n" \
-Sspamfilter-noham="bogofilter -N" \
-Sspamfilter-nospam="bogofilter -S" \
-Sspamfilter-rate="bogofilter -TTu 2>/dev/null" \
-Sspamfilter-spam="bogofilter -s" \
-Sspamfilter-rate-scanscore="1;^(.+)$"
Because messages must exist on local storage in order to be scored
(or used for Bayesian filter training), it is possibly a good idea to
perform the local spam check last. Spam can be checked automatically when
opening specific folders by setting a specialized form of the internal
variable folder-hook.
define spamdelhook {
# Server side DCC
spamset (header x-dcc-brand-metrics "bulk")
# Server-side spamassassin(1)
spamset (header x-spam-flag "YES")
del :s # TODO we HAVE to be able to do `spamrate :u ! :sS'
move :S +maybe-spam
spamrate :u
del :s
move :S +maybe-spam
}
set folder-hook-SOMEFOLDER=spamdelhook
See also the documentation for the variables
spam-interface, spam-maxsize,
spamc-command, spamc-arguments,
spamc-user, spamfilter-ham,
spamfilter-noham,
spamfilter-nospam,
spamfilter-rate and
spamfilter-rate-scanscore.
S-nail reads input in lines. An unquoted reverse solidus
‘\ ’ at the end of a command line
“escapes” the newline character: it is discarded and the next
line of input is used as a follow-up line, with all leading whitespace
removed; once an entire line is completed, the whitespace characters
space , tabulator ,
newline as well as those defined by the variable
ifs are removed from the beginning and end. Placing any
whitespace characters at the beginning of a line will prevent a possible
addition of the command line to the [Option]al
history .
The beginning of such input lines is then scanned for the name of
a known command: command names may be abbreviated, in which case the first
command that matches the given prefix will be used.
Command modifiers may prefix a
command in order to modify its behaviour. A name may also be a
commandalias , which will become expanded until no
more expansion is possible. Once the command that shall be executed is
known, the remains of the input line will be interpreted according to
command-specific rules, documented in the following.
This behaviour is different to the
sh(1)ell,
which is a programming language with syntactic elements of clearly defined
semantics, and therefore capable to sequentially expand and evaluate
individual elements of a line. ‘? set one=value
two=$one ’ for example will never possibly assign value to one,
because the variable assignment is performed no sooner but by the command
(set ), long after the expansion happened.
A list of all commands in lookup order is dumped by the command
list . [Option]ally the command
help (or ? ), when given an
argument, will show a documentation string for the command matching the
expanded argument, as in ‘?t ’, which
should be a shorthand of ‘?type ’; with
these documentation strings both commands support a more
verbose listing mode which includes the argument type
of the command and other information which applies; a handy suggestion might
thus be:
? define __xv {
# Before v15: need to enable sh(1)ell-style on _entire_ line!
localopts yes;wysh set verbose;ignerr eval "${@}";return ${?}
}
? commandalias xv '\call __xv'
? xv help set
Commands may be prefixed by none to multiple command modifiers. Some command
modifiers can be used with a restricted set of commands only, the
verbose version of list will
([Option]ally) show which modifiers apply.
- The modifier reverse solidus
\ , to be placed
first, prevents commandalias expansions on the
remains of the line, for example
‘\echo ’ will always evaluate the
command echo , even if an (command)alias of the
same name exists. commandalias content may itself
contain further command modifiers, including an initial reverse solidus to
prevent further expansions.
- The modifier
ignerr indicates that any error
generated by the following command should be ignored by the state machine
and not cause a program exit with enabled errexit or
for the standardized exit cases in posix mode.
?, one of the
INTERNAL VARIABLES, will be
set to the real exit status of the command regardless.
local
will alter the called command to apply changes only temporarily, local to
block-scope, and can thus only be used inside of a
define d macro or an
account definition. Specifying it implies the
modifier wysh . Local variables will not be
inherited by macros deeper in the call chain, and
all local settings will be garbage collected once the local scope is left.
To record and unroll changes in the global scope use the command
localopts .
scope
does yet not implement any functionality.
u
does yet not implement any functionality.
- Some commands support the
vput modifier: if used,
they expect the name of a variable, which can itself be a variable, i.e.,
shell expansion is applied, as their first argument, and will place their
computation result in it instead of the default location (it is usually
written to standard output).
The given name will be tested for being a valid
sh(1)
variable name, and may therefore only consist of upper- and lowercase
characters, digits, and the underscore; the hyphen-minus may be used as
a non-portable extension; digits may not be used as first, hyphen-minus
may not be used as last characters. In addition the name may either not
be one of the known INTERNAL
VARIABLES, or must otherwise refer to a writable (non-boolean) value
variable. The actual put operation may fail nonetheless, for example if
the variable expects a number argument only a number will be accepted.
Any error during these operations causes the command as such to fail,
and the error number ! will be set to
^ERR-NOTSUP, the exit status
? should be set to
‘-1 ’, but some commands deviate
from the latter, which is documented.
- Last, but not least, the modifier
wysh can be used
for some old and established commands to choose the new
Shell-style argument
quoting rules over the traditional
Old-style argument
quoting. This modifier is implied if v15-compat
is set to a non-empty value.
[v15 behaviour may differ] This section documents the traditional and POSIX
standardized style of quoting non-message list arguments to commands which
expect this type of arguments: whereas still used by the majority of such
commands, the new
Shell-style argument
quoting may be available even for those via wysh ,
one of the Command modifiers.
Nonetheless care must be taken, because only new commands have been designed
with all the capabilities of the new quoting rules in mind, which can, for
example generate control characters.
- An argument can be enclosed between paired double-quotes
‘
"argument" ’ or
single-quotes ‘'argument' ’; any
whitespace, shell word expansion, or reverse solidus characters (except as
described next) within the quotes are treated literally as part of the
argument. A double-quote will be treated literally within single-quotes
and vice versa. Inside such a quoted string the actually used quote
character can be used nonetheless by escaping it with a reverse solidus
‘\ ’, as in
‘"y\"ou" ’.
- An argument that is not enclosed in quotes, as above, can usually still
contain space characters if those spaces are reverse solidus escaped, as
in ‘
you\ are ’.
- A reverse solidus outside of the enclosing quotes is discarded and the
following character is treated literally as part of the argument.
sh(1)ell-style,
and therefore POSIX standardized, argument parsing and quoting rules are used
by most commands. [v15 behaviour may differ] Most new commands only support
these new rules and are flagged [Only new quoting rules], some elder ones can
use them with the command modifier wysh ; in the future
only this type of argument quoting will remain.
A command line is parsed from left to right and an input token is
completed whenever an unquoted, otherwise ignored, metacharacter is seen.
Metacharacters are vertical bar | , ampersand
& , semicolon ; , as well
as all characters from the variable ifs, and / or
space , tabulator ,
newline . The additional metacharacters left and
right parenthesis ( , ) and
less-than and greater-than signs < ,
> that the
sh(1)
supports are not used, and are treated as ordinary characters: for one these
characters are a vivid part of email addresses, and it seems highly unlikely
that their function will become meaningful to S-nail.
Compatibility note: [v15
behaviour may differ] Please note that even many new-style commands do not yet
honour ifs to parse their arguments: whereas the
sh(1)ell is a
language with syntactic elements of clearly defined semantics, S-nail parses
entire input lines and decides on a per-command base what to do with the rest
of the line. This also means that whenever an unknown command is seen all that
S-nail can do is cancellation of the processing of the remains of the line.
It also often depends on an actual subcommand of a multiplexer
command how the rest of the line should be treated, and until v15 we are not
capable to perform this deep inspection of arguments. Nonetheless, at least
the following commands which work with positional parameters fully support
ifs for an almost shell-compatible field splitting:
call , call_if ,
read , vpospar ,
xcall .
Any unquoted number sign ‘# ’
at the beginning of a new token starts a comment that extends to the end of
the line, and therefore ends argument processing. An unquoted dollar sign
‘$ ’ will cause variable expansion of
the given name, which must be a valid
sh(1)ell-style
variable name (see vput ):
INTERNAL VARIABLES as well as
ENVIRONMENT (shell) variables can be
accessed through this mechanism, brace enclosing the name is supported
(i.e., to subdivide a token).
Whereas the metacharacters space ,
tabulator , newline only
complete an input token, vertical bar | , ampersand
& and semicolon ; also
act as control operators and perform control functions. For now supported is
semicolon ; , which terminates a single command,
therefore sequencing the command line and making the remainder of the line a
subject to reevaluation. With sequencing, multiple command argument types
and quoting rules may therefore apply to a single line, which can become
problematic before v15: e.g., the first of the following will cause
surprising results.
? echo one; set verbose; echo
verbose=$verbose.
? echo one; wysh set verbose; echo
verbose=$verbose.
Quoting is a mechanism that will remove the special meaning of
metacharacters and reserved words, and will prevent expansion. There are
four quoting mechanisms: the escape character, single-quotes, double-quotes
and dollar-single-quotes:
- The literal value of any character can be preserved by preceding it with
the escape character reverse solidus
‘
\ ’.
- Arguments which are enclosed in
‘
'single-quotes' ’ retain their
literal value. A single-quote cannot occur within single-quotes.
- The literal value of all characters enclosed in
‘
"double-quotes" ’ is
retained, with the exception of dollar sign
‘$ ’, which will cause variable
expansion, as above, backquote (grave accent)
‘` ’, (which not yet means anything
special), reverse solidus ‘\ ’, which
will escape any of the characters dollar sign
‘$ ’ (to prevent variable expansion),
backquote (grave accent) ‘` ’,
double-quote ‘" ’ (to prevent
ending the quote) and reverse solidus
‘\ ’ (to prevent escaping, i.e., to
embed a reverse solidus character as-is), but has no special meaning
otherwise.
- Arguments enclosed in
‘
$'dollar-single-quotes' ’ extend
normal single quotes in that reverse solidus escape sequences are expanded
as follows:
- ‘
\a ’
- bell control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BEL).
- ‘
\b ’
- backspace control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 BS).
- ‘
\E ’
- escape control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 ESC).
- ‘
\e ’
- the same.
- ‘
\f ’
- form feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 FF).
- ‘
\n ’
- line feed control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 LF).
- ‘
\r ’
- carriage return control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 CR).
- ‘
\t ’
- horizontal tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 HT).
- ‘
\v ’
- vertical tabulator control character (ASCII and ISO-10646 VT).
- ‘
\\ ’
- emits a reverse solidus character.
- ‘
\' ’
- single quote.
- ‘
\" ’
- double quote (escaping is optional).
- ‘
\NNN ’
- eight-bit byte with the octal value
‘
NNN ’ (one to three octal
digits), optionally prefixed by an additional
‘0 ’. A 0 byte will suppress
further output for the quoted argument.
- ‘
\xHH ’
- eight-bit byte with the hexadecimal value
‘
HH ’ (one or two hexadecimal
characters, no prefix, see vexpr ). A 0 byte
will suppress further output for the quoted argument.
- ‘
\UHHHHHHHH ’
- the Unicode / ISO-10646 character with the hexadecimal codepoint value
‘
HHHHHHHH ’ (one to eight
hexadecimal characters) — note that Unicode defines the maximum
codepoint ever to be supported as
‘0x10FFFF ’ (in planes of
‘0xFFFF ’ characters each). This
escape is only supported in locales that support Unicode (see
Character sets), in other
cases the sequence will remain unexpanded unless the given code point
is ASCII compatible or (if the [Option]al character set conversion is
available) can be represented in the current locale. The character NUL
will suppress further output for the quoted argument.
- ‘
\uHHHH ’
- Identical to ‘
\UHHHHHHHH ’ except
it takes only one to four hexadecimal characters.
- ‘
\cX ’
- Emits the non-printable (ASCII and compatible) C0 control codes 0
(NUL) to 31 (US), and 127 (DEL). Printable representations of ASCII
control codes can be created by mapping them to a different, visible
part of the ASCII character set. Adding the number 64 achieves this
for the codes 0 to 31, here 7 (BEL): ‘
7 + 64 =
71 = G ’. The real operation is a bitwise logical XOR
with 64 (bit 7 set, see vexpr ), thus also
covering code 127 (DEL), which is mapped to 63 (question mark):
‘? vexpr ^ 127 64 ’.
Whereas historically circumflex notation has often been
used for visualization purposes of control codes, as in
‘^G ’, the reverse solidus
notation has been standardized:
‘\cG ’. Some control codes also
have standardized (ISO-10646, ISO C) aliases, as shown above
(‘\a ’,
‘\n ’,
‘\t ’ etc) : whenever such an
alias exists it will be used for display purposes. The control code
NUL (‘\c@ ’, a non-standard
extension) will suppress further output for the remains of the token
(which may extend beyond the current quote), or, depending on the
context, the remains of all arguments for the current command.
- ‘
\$NAME ’
- Non-standard extension: expand the given variable name, as above.
Brace enclosing the name is supported.
- ‘
\`{command} ’
- Not yet supported, just to raise awareness: Non-standard
extension.
Caveats:
? echo 'Quotes '${HOME}' and 'tokens" differ!"# no comment
? echo Quotes ${HOME} and tokens differ! # comment
? echo Don"'"t you worry$'\x21' The sun shines on us. $'\u263A'
Many commands operate on message list specifications, as documented in
Specifying messages. The
argument input is first split into individual tokens via
Shell-style argument
quoting, which are then interpreted as the mentioned specifications. If no
explicit message list has been specified, many commands will search for and
use the next message forward that satisfies the commands' requirements, and if
there are no messages forward of the current message, the search proceeds
backwards; if there are no good messages at all to be found, an error message
is shown and the command is aborted. The verbose output
of the command list will indicate whether a command
searches for a default message, or not.
A special set of commands, which all have the string “codec” in
their name, like addrcodec ,
shcodec , urlcodec , take raw
string data as input, which means that the content of the command input line
is passed completely unexpanded and otherwise unchanged: like this the effect
of the actual codec is visible without any noise of possible shell quoting
rules etc., i.e., the user can input one-to-one the desired or questionable
data. To gain a level of expansion, the entire command line can be
eval uated first, for example
? vput shcodec res encode /usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt
? echo $res
$'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
? shcodec d $res
$'/usr/Sch\u00F6nes Wetter/heute.txt'
? eval shcodec d $res
/usr/Schönes Wetter/heute.txt
Filenames, where expected, and unless documented otherwise, are subsequently
subject to the following filename transformations, in sequence:
- If the given name is a registered
shortcut , it
will be replaced with the expanded shortcut. This step is mostly taken for
folder s only.
- The filename is matched against the following patterns or strings. But for
plus +file folder expansion
this step is mostly taken for
folder s only.
- #
- (Number sign) is expanded to the previous file.
- %
- (Percent sign) is replaced by the invoking user's primary system
mailbox, which either is the (itself expandable)
inbox if that is set, the standardized absolute
pathname indicated by
MAIL if that is set, or
a built-in compile-time default otherwise. When opening a
folder the used name is actively checked for
being a primary mailbox, first against inbox,
then against MAIL .
- %user
- Expands to the primary system mailbox of user
(and never the value of inbox, regardless of its
actual setting).
- &
- (Ampersand) is replaced with the invoking user's secondary mailbox,
the
MBOX .
- +file
- Refers to a file in the
folder directory (if that variable is set).
- %:filespec
- Expands to the same value as filespec, but has
special meaning when used with, for example, the command
folder : the file will be treated as a primary
system mailbox by, among others, the mbox and
save commands, meaning that messages that have
been read in the current session will be moved to the
MBOX mailbox instead of simply being flagged
as read.
- Meta expansions may be applied to the resulting filename, as allowed by
the operation and applicable to the resulting access protocol (also see
On URL syntax
and credential lookup). For the file-protocol, a leading tilde
‘
~ ’ character will be replaced by
the expansion of HOME , except when followed by a
valid user name, in which case the home directory of the given user is
used instead.
A shell expansion as if specified in double-quotes (see
Shell-style argument
quoting) may be applied, so that any occurrence of
‘$VARIABLE ’ (or
‘${VARIABLE} ’) will be replaced by
the expansion of the variable, if possible;
INTERNAL VARIABLES as well
as ENVIRONMENT (shell) variables
can be accessed through this mechanism.
Shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions
(glob(7))
may be applied as documented. If the fully expanded filename results in
multiple pathnames and the command is expecting only one file, an error
results.
In interactive context, in order to allow simple value
acceptance (via “ENTER”), arguments will usually be
displayed in a properly quoted form, so a file
‘diet\ is \curd.txt ’ may be
displayed as ‘'diet\ is
\curd.txt' ’.
The following commands are available:
!
- Executes the
SHELL command which follows,
replacing unescaped exclamation marks with the previously executed command
if the internal variable bang is set. This command
supports vput as documented in
Command modifiers, and manages
the error number !. A 0 or positive exit status
? reflects the exit status of the command, negative
ones that an error happened before the command was executed, or that the
program did not exit cleanly, but maybe due to a signal: the error number
is ^ERR-CHILD, then.
In conjunction with the vput modifier
the following special cases exist: a negative exit status occurs if the
collected data could not be stored in the given variable, which is a
^ERR-NOTSUP error that should otherwise not occur.
^ERR-CANCELED indicates that no temporary file
could be created to collect the command output at first glance. In case
of catchable out-of-memory situations ^ERR-NOMEM
will occur and S-nail will try to store the empty string, just like with
all other detected error conditions.
#
- The comment-command causes the entire line to be ignored.
Note: this really is a normal command which' purpose is
to discard its arguments, not a “comment-start” indicating
special character, which means that for example trailing comments on a
line are not possible (except for commands which use
Shell-style argument
quoting).
+
- Goes to the next message in sequence and types it (like
“ENTER”).
-
- Display the preceding message, or the n'th previous message if given a
numeric argument n.
=
- Shows the message number of the current message (the “dot”)
when used without arguments, that of the given list otherwise. Output
numbers will be separated from each other with the first character of
ifs, and followed by the first character of
if-ws, if that is not empty and not identical to the
first. If that results in no separation at all a
space character is used. This command supports
vput (see
Command modifiers), and
manages the error number !.
?
- [Option] Show a brief summary of commands. [Option] Given an argument a
synopsis for the command in question is shown instead; commands can be
abbreviated in general and this command can be used to see the full
expansion of an abbreviation including the synopsis, try, for example
‘
?h ’,
‘?hel ’ and
‘?help ’ and see how the output
changes. To avoid that aliases are resolved the modifier
\ can be prepended to the argument, but note it
must be quoted. This mode also supports a more
verbose output, which will provide the information
documented for list .
|
- A synonym for the
pipe command.
account ,
unaccount
- (ac, una) Creates, selects or lists (an) account(s). Accounts are special
incarnations of
define d macros and group commands
and variable settings which together usually arrange the environment for
the purpose of creating an email account. Different to normal macros
settings which are covered by localopts –
here by default enabled! – will not be reverted before the
account is changed again. The special account
‘null ’ (case-insensitive) always
exists, and all but it can be deleted by the latter command, and in one
operation with the special name ‘* ’.
Also for all but it a possibly set
on-account-cleanup hook is called once they are
left, also for program exit.
Without arguments a listing of all defined accounts is shown.
With one argument the given account is activated: the system
inbox of that account will be activated (as via
folder ), a possibly installed
folder-hook will be run, and the internal variable
account will be updated. The two argument form
behaves identical to defining a macro as via
define . Important settings for accounts include
folder, from,
hostname, inbox,
mta, password and
user
(On URL syntax
and credential lookup), as well as things like
tls-config-pairs
(Encrypted network
communication), and protocol specifics like
imap-auth, pop3-auth,
smtp-auth.
account myisp {
set folder=~/mail inbox=+syste.mbox record=+sent.mbox
set from='(My Name) myname@myisp.example'
set mta=smtp://mylogin@smtp.myisp.example
}
addrcodec
- Perform email address codec transformations on raw-data argument, rather
according to email standards (RFC 5322; [v15 behaviour may differ] will
furtherly improve). Supports
vput (see
Command modifiers), and
manages the error number !. The first argument must
be either [+[+[+]]]e[ncode],
d[ecode], s[kin] or
skinl[ist] and specifies the operation to perform on
the rest of the line.
Decoding will show how a standard-compliant MUA will display
the given argument, which should be an email address. Please be aware
that most MUAs have difficulties with the address standards, and vary
wildly when (comments) in parenthesis, “double-quoted”
strings, or quoted-pairs, as below, become involved. [v15 behaviour may
differ] S-nail currently does not perform decoding when displaying
addresses.
Skinning is identical to decoding but only outputs the plain
address, without any string, comment etc. components. Another difference
is that it may fail with the error number ! set to
^ERR-INVAL if decoding fails to find a(n) (valid)
email address, in which case the unmodified input will be output
again.
skinlist first performs a skin
operation, and thereafter checks a valid address for whether it is a
registered mailing list (see mlist and
mlsubscribe ), eventually reporting that state in
the error number ! as
^ERR-EXIST. (This state could later become
overwritten by an I/O error, though.)
Encoding supports four different modes, lesser automated
versions can be chosen by prefixing one, two or three plus signs: the
standard imposes a special meaning on some characters, which thus have
to be transformed to so-called quoted-pairs by pairing them with a
reverse solidus ‘\ ’ in order to
remove the special meaning; this might change interpretation of the
entire argument from what has been desired, however! Specify one plus
sign to remark that parenthesis shall be left alone, two for not turning
double quotation marks into quoted-pairs, and three for also leaving any
user-specified reverse solidus alone. The result will always be valid,
if a successful exit status is reported ([v15 behaviour may differ] the
current parser fails this assertion for some constructs). [v15 behaviour
may differ] Addresses need to be specified in between angle brackets
‘< ’,
‘> ’ if the construct becomes
more difficult, otherwise the current parser will fail; it is not smart
enough to guess right.
? addrc enc "Hey, you",<diet@exam.ple>\ out\ there
"\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
? addrc d "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
"Hey, you", \ out\ there <diet@exam.ple>
? addrc s "\"Hey, you\", \\ out\\ there" <diet@exam.ple>
diet@exam.ple
alias ,
unalias
- [Only new quoting rules](a, una) Define or list, and remove, respectively,
address aliases, which are a method of creating personal distribution
lists that map a single name to none to multiple receivers, to be expanded
after Compose mode is left; the
expansion correlates with metoo. The latter command
removes all given aliases, the special name asterisk
‘
* ’ will remove all existing
aliases. When used without arguments the former shows a list of all
currently known aliases, with one argument only the target(s) of the given
one. When given two arguments, hyphen-minus
‘- ’ being the first, the target(s)
of the second is/are expanded recursively.
In all other cases the given alias is newly defined, or will
be appended to: arguments must either be themselves valid alias names,
or any other address type (see
On
sending mail, and non-interactive mode). Recursive expansion of
aliases can be prevented by prefixing the desired argument with the
modifier reverse solidus \ . A valid alias name
conforms to mta-aliases syntax, but follow-up
characters can also be the number sign
‘# ’, colon
‘: ’, commercial at
‘@, ’ exclamation mark
‘! ’, period
‘. ’ as well as “any
character that has the high bit set”. The dollar sign
‘$ ’ may be the last character. The
number sign ‘# ’ may need
Shell-style argument
quoting.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Unfortunately the colon is
currently not supported, as it interferes with normal address parsing
rules. [v15 behaviour may differ] Such high bit characters will likely
cause warnings at the moment for the same reasons why colon is
unsupported; also, in the future locale dependent character set validity
checks will be performed.
? alias cohorts bill jkf mark kridle@ucbcory ~/cohorts.mbox
? alias mark mark@exam.ple
? set mta-aliases=/etc/aliases
alternates ,
unalternates
- [Only new quoting rules] (alt) Manage a list of alternate addresses or
names of the active user, members of which will be removed from recipient
lists (except one). There is a set of implicit alternates which is formed
of the values of
LOGNAME ,
from, sender and
reply-to. from will not be
used if sender is set. The latter command removes
the given list of alternates, the special name
‘* ’ will discard all existing
alternate names.
The former command manages the error number
!. It shows the current set of alternates when
used without arguments; in this mode only it also supports
vput (see
Command modifiers).
Otherwise the given arguments (after being checked for validity) are
appended to the list of alternate names; in posix
mode they replace that list instead.
answered ,
unanswered
- Take a message lists and mark each message as (not) having been answered.
Messages will be marked answered when being
reply d
to automatically if the markanswered variable is
set. See the section Message
states.
bind ,
unbind
- [Option][Only new quoting rules] The bind command extends the MLE (see
On terminal
control and line editor) with freely configurable key bindings. The
latter command removes from the given context the given key binding, both
of which may be specified as a wildcard
‘
* ’, so that
‘unbind * * ’ will remove all
bindings of all contexts. Due to initialization order unbinding will not
work for built-in key bindings upon program startup, however: please use
line-editor-no-defaults for this purpose instead.
With zero arguments, or with a context name the former command
shows all key bindings (of the given context; an asterisk
‘* ’ will iterate over all
contexts); a more verbose listing will be produced if either of
debug or verbose are set.
With two or more arguments a specific binding is shown, or
(re)established: the first argument is the context to which the binding
shall apply, the second argument is a comma-separated list of the
“keys” which form the binding. Further arguments will be
joined to form the expansion, and cause the binding to be created or
updated. To indicate that a binding shall not be auto-committed, but
that the expansion shall instead be furtherly editable by the user, a
commercial at ‘@ ’ (that will be
removed) can be placed last in the expansion, from which leading and
trailing whitespace will finally be removed. Reverse solidus cannot be
used as the last character of expansion. An empty expansion will be
rejected.
Contexts define when a binding applies, i.e., a binding will
not be seen unless the context for which it is defined for is currently
active. This is not true for the shared binding
‘base ’, which is the foundation
for all other bindings and as such always applies, its bindings,
however, only apply secondarily. The available contexts are the shared
‘base ’, the
‘default ’ context which is used in
all not otherwise documented situations, and
‘compose ’, which applies only to
Compose mode.
Bindings are specified as a comma-separated list of
byte-sequences, where each list entry corresponds to one
“key” (press). Byte sequence boundaries will be forcefully
terminated after bind-inter-byte-timeout
milliseconds, whereas key sequences can be timed out via
bind-inter-key-timeout. A list entry may,
indicated by a leading colon character
‘: ’, also refer to the name of a
terminal capability; several dozen names are compiled in and may be
specified either by their
terminfo(5),
or, if existing, by their
termcap(5)
name, regardless of the actually used [Option]al terminal control
library. But any capability may be used, as long as the name is
resolvable by the [Option]al control library, or was defined via the
internal variable termcap. Input sequences are not
case-normalized, an exact match is required to update or remove a
binding. It is advisable to use an initial escape or other control
character (like ‘\cA ’) for user
(as opposed to purely terminal capability based) bindings in order to
avoid ambiguities; it also reduces search time. Examples:
? bind base a,b echo one
? bind base $'\E',d mle-snarf-word-fwd # Esc(ape)
? bind base $'\E',$'\c?' mle-snarf-word-bwd # Esc,Delete
? bind default $'\cA',:khome,w 'echo Editable binding@'
? bind default a,b,c rm -irf / @ # Also editable
? bind default :kf1 File %
? bind compose :kf1 ~v
Note that the entire comma-separated list is first parsed
(over) as a shell-token with whitespace as the field separator, then
parsed and expanded for real with comma as the field separator,
therefore whitespace needs to be properly quoted, see
Shell-style argument
quoting. Using Unicode reverse solidus escape sequences renders a
binding defunctional if the locale does not support Unicode (see
Character sets), and using
terminal capabilities does so if no (corresponding) terminal control
support is (currently) available. Adding, deleting or modifying a key
binding invalidates the internal prebuilt lookup tree, it will be
recreated as necessary: this process will be visualized in most
verbose as well as in debug
mode.
The following terminal capability names are built-in and can
be used in
terminfo(5)
or (if available) the two-letter
termcap(5)
notation. See the respective manual for a list of capabilities. The
program
infocmp(1)
can be used to show all the capabilities of TERM
or the given terminal type; using the -x flag
will also show supported (non-standard) extensions.
kbs or kb
- Backspace.
kdch1 or
kD
- Delete character.
kDC or *4
- — shifted variant.
kel or kE
- Clear to end of line.
kext or @9
- Exit.
kich1 or
kI
- Insert character.
kIC or #3
- — shifted variant.
khome or
kh
- Home.
kHOM or #2
- — shifted variant.
kend or @7
- End.
knp or kN
- Next page.
kpp or kP
- Previous page.
kcub1 or
kl
- Left cursor (with more modifiers: see below).
kLFT or #4
- — shifted variant.
kcuf1 or
kr
- Right cursor (ditto).
kRIT or %i
- — shifted variant.
kcud1 or
kd
- Down cursor (ditto).
kDN
- — shifted variant (only terminfo).
kcuu1 or
ku
- Up cursor (ditto).
kUP
- — shifted variant (only terminfo).
kf0 or k0
- Function key 0. Add one for each function key up to
kf9 and k9 ,
respectively.
kf10 or k;
- Function key 10.
kf11 or F1
- Function key 11. Add one for each function key up to
kf19 and F9 ,
respectively.
Some terminals support key-modifier combination extensions,
e.g., ‘Alt+Shift+xy ’. For example,
the delete key, kdch1 : in its shifted variant,
the name is mutated to kDC , then a number is
appended for the states ‘Alt ’
(kDC3 ),
‘Shift+Alt ’
(kDC4 ),
‘Control ’
(kDC5 ),
‘Shift+Control ’
(kDC6 ),
‘Alt+Control ’
(kDC7 ), finally
‘Shift+Alt+Control ’
(kDC8 ). The same for the left cursor key,
kcub1 : KLFT ,
KLFT3 , KLFT4 ,
KLFT5 , KLFT6 ,
KLFT7 , KLFT8 .
call
- [Only new quoting rules] Calls the given macro, which must have been
created via
define (see there for more), otherwise
an ^ERR-NOENT error occurs. Calling macros
recursively will at some time excess the stack size limit, causing a hard
program abortion; if recursively calling a macro is the last command of
the current macro, consider to use the command
xcall , which will first release all resources of
the current macro before replacing the current macro with the called
one.
call_if
- Identical to
call if the given macro has been
created via define , but does not fail nor warn if
the macro does not exist.
cd
- Synonym for
chdir .
certsave
- [Option] Only applicable to S/MIME signed messages. Takes an optional
message list and a filename and saves the certificates contained within
the message signatures to the named file in both human-readable and PEM
format. The certificates can later be used to send encrypted messages to
the respective message senders by setting
smime-encrypt-USER@HOST variables.
charsetalias ,
uncharsetalias
- [Only new quoting rules] Manage alias mappings for (conversion of)
Character sets. Alias processing
is not performed for INTERNAL
VARIABLES, for example charset-8bit, and
mappings are ineffective if character set conversion is not available
(features does not announce
‘
,+iconv, ’). Expansion happens
recursively for cases where aliases point to other aliases (built-in loop
limit: 8).
The latter command deletes all aliases given as arguments, or
all at once when given the asterisk
‘* ’. The former shows the list of
all currently defined aliases if used without arguments, or the target
of the given single argument; when given two arguments, hyphen-minus
‘- ’ being the first, the second is
instead expanded recursively. In all other cases the given arguments are
treated as pairs of character sets and their desired target alias name,
creating new or updating already existing aliases.
chdir
- [Only new quoting rules](ch) Change the working directory to
HOME or the given argument. Synonym for
cd .
collapse ,
uncollapse
- Only applicable to ‘
thread ’ed
sort mode. Takes a message list and makes all
replies to these messages invisible in header summaries, except for
‘new ’ messages and the
“dot”. Also when a message with collapsed replies is
displayed, all of these are automatically uncollapsed. The latter command
undoes collapsing.
colour ,
uncolour
- [Option][Only new quoting rules] Manage colour mappings of and for a
Coloured display. Without
arguments the former shows all currently defined mappings. Otherwise a
colour type is expected (case-insensitively), it must be one of
‘
256 ’ for 256-colour terminals,
‘8 ’,
‘ansi ’ or
‘iso ’ for the standard 8-colour ANSI
/ ISO 6429 colour palette, and ‘1 ’
or ‘mono ’ for monochrome terminals,
which only support (some) font attributes. Without further arguments the
list of all currently defined mappings of the given type is shown (here
the special ‘all ’ or
‘* ’ also show all currently defined
mappings).
Otherwise the second argument defines the mappable slot, the
third argument a (comma-separated list of) colour and font attribute
specification(s), and the optionally supported fourth argument can be
used to specify a precondition: if conditioned mappings exist they are
tested in (creation) order unless a (case-insensitive) match has been
found, and the default mapping (if any has been established) will only
be chosen as a last resort. The types of available preconditions depend
on the mappable slot, the following of which exist:
Mappings prefixed with
‘mle- ’ are used for the [Option]al
built-in Mailx-Line-Editor (MLE, see
On terminal
control and line editor) and do not support preconditions.
- mle-position
- This mapping is used for the position indicator that is visible when a
line cannot be fully displayed on the screen.
- mle-prompt
- Used for the prompt.
- mle-error
- Used for the occasionally appearing error indicator that is joined
onto prompt. [v15 behaviour may differ] Also
used for error messages written on standard error .
Mappings prefixed with
‘sum- ’ are used in header
summaries, and they all understand the preconditions
‘dot ’ (the current message) and
‘older ’ for elder messages (only
honoured in conjunction with
datefield-markout-older).
- sum-dotmark
- This mapping is used for the “dotmark” that can be
created with the ‘
%> ’ or
‘%< ’ formats of the variable
headline.
- sum-header
- For the complete header summary line except the
“dotmark” and the thread structure.
- sum-thread
- For the thread structure which can be created with the
‘
%i ’ format of the variable
headline.
Mappings prefixed with
‘view- ’ are used when displaying
messages.
- view-from_
- This mapping is used for so-called
‘
From_ ’ lines, which are MBOX
file format specific header lines (also see
mbox-rfc4155).
- view-header
- For header lines. A comma-separated list of headers to which the
mapping applies may be given as a precondition; if the [Option]al
regular expression support is available then if any of the
magic
regular expression characters is seen the precondition will be
evaluated as (an extended) one.
- view-msginfo
- For the introductional message info line.
- view-partinfo
- For MIME part info lines.
The following (case-insensitive) colour definitions and font
attributes are understood, multiple of which can be specified in a
comma-separated list:
- ft=
- a font attribute: ‘
bold ’,
‘reverse ’ or
‘underline ’. It is possible (and
often applicable) to specify multiple font attributes for a single
mapping.
- fg=
- foreground colour attribute, in order (numbers 0 - 7)
‘
black ’,
‘red ’,
‘green ’,
‘brown ’,
‘blue ’,
‘magenta ’,
‘cyan ’ or
‘white ’. To specify a 256-colour
mode a decimal number colour specification in the range 0 to 255,
inclusive, is supported, and interpreted as follows:
- 0 - 7
- the standard ISO 6429 colours, as above.
- 8 - 15
- high intensity variants of the standard colours.
- 16 - 231
- 216 colours in tuples of 6.
- 232 - 255
- grayscale from black to white in 24 steps.
#!/bin/sh -
fg() { printf "\033[38;5;${1}m($1)"; }
bg() { printf "\033[48;5;${1}m($1)"; }
i=0
while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do fg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
printf "\033[0m\n"
i=0
while [ $i -lt 256 ]; do bg $i; i=$(($i + 1)); done
printf "\033[0m\n"
- bg=
- background colour attribute (see
fg= for
possible values).
The command uncolour will remove for
the given colour type (the special type
‘* ’ selects all) the given
mapping; if the optional precondition argument is given only the exact
tuple of mapping and precondition is removed. The special name
‘* ’ will remove all mappings (no
precondition allowed), thus ‘uncolour *
* ’ will remove all established mappings.
commandalias ,
uncommandalias
- [Only new quoting rules] Define or list, and remove, respectively, command
aliases. An (command)alias can be used everywhere a normal command can be
used, but always takes precedence: any arguments that are given to the
command alias are joined onto the alias expansion, and the resulting
string forms the command line that is, in effect, executed. The latter
command removes all given aliases, the special name asterisk
‘
* ’ will remove all existing
aliases. When used without arguments the former shows a list of all
currently known aliases, with one argument only the expansion of the given
one.
With two or more arguments a command alias is defined or
updated: the first argument is the name under which the remaining
command line should be accessible, the content of which can be just
about anything. An alias may itself expand to another alias, but to
avoid expansion loops further expansion will be prevented if an alias
refers to itself or if an expansion depth limit is reached. Explicit
expansion prevention is available via reverse solidus
\ , one of the
Command modifiers.
? commandalias xx
s-nail: `commandalias': no such alias: xx
? commandalias xx echo hello,
? commandalias xx
commandalias xx 'echo hello,'
? xx
hello,
? xx world
hello, world
Copy
- (C) Similar to
copy , but copy the messages to a
file named after the local part of the sender of the first message instead
of taking a filename argument; outfolder is
inspected to decide on the actual storage location.
copy
- (c) Copy messages to the named file and do not mark them as being saved;
otherwise identical to
save .
csop
- [Only new quoting rules] A multiplexer command which provides C-style
string operations on 8-bit bytes without a notion of locale settings and
character sets, effectively assuming ASCII data. For numeric and other
operations refer to
vexpr .
vput , one of the
Command modifiers, is
supported. The error result is ‘-1 ’
for usage errors and numeric results, the empty string otherwise; missing
data errors, as for unsuccessful searches, result in the
! error number being set to
^ERR-NODATA. Where the question mark
‘? ’ modifier suffix is supported, a
case-insensitive (ASCII mapping) operation mode is supported; the keyword
‘case ’ is optional so that
‘find? ’ and
‘find?case ’ are identical.
length
- Queries the length of the given argument.
hash ,
hash32
- Calculates a hash value of the given argument. The latter will return
a 32-bit result regardless of host environment.
‘
? ’ modifier suffix is
supported. These use Chris Torek's hash algorithm, the resulting hash
value is bit mixed as shown by Bret Mulvey.
find
- Search for the second in the first argument. Shows the resulting
0-based offset shall it have been found.
‘
? ’ modifier suffix is
supported.
substring
- Creates a substring of its first argument. The optional second
argument is the 0-based starting offset, a negative one counts from
the end; the optional third argument specifies the length of the
desired result, a negative length leaves off the given number of bytes
at the end of the original string; by default the entire string is
used. This operation tries to work around faulty arguments (set
verbose for error logs), but reports them via
the error number ! as
^ERR-OVERFLOW.
trim
- Trim away whitespace characters from both ends of the argument.
trim-front
- Trim away whitespace characters from the begin of the argument.
trim-end
- Trim away whitespace characters from the end of the argument.
cwd
- Show the name of the current working directory, as reported by
getcwd(3).
Supports
vput (see
Command modifiers). The return
status is tracked via ?.
Decrypt
- [Option] For unencrypted messages this command is identical to
Copy ; Encrypted messages are first decrypted, if
possible, and then copied.
decrypt
- [Option] For unencrypted messages this command is identical to
copy ; Encrypted messages are first decrypted, if
possible, and then copied.
define ,
undefine
- The latter command deletes the given macro, the special name
‘
* ’ will discard all existing
macros. Deletion of (a) macro(s) can be performed from within running (a)
macro(s), including self-deletion. Without arguments the former command
prints the current list of macros, including their content, otherwise it
defines a macro, replacing an existing one of the same name as applicable.
A defined macro can be invoked explicitly by using the
call , call_if and
xcall commands, or implicitly if a macro hook is
triggered, for example a folder-hook. Execution of
a macro body can be stopped from within by calling
return .
Temporary macro block-scope variables can be created or
deleted with the local command modifier in
conjunction with the commands set and
unset , respectively. To enforce unrolling of
changes made to (global)
INTERNAL VARIABLES the
command localopts can be used instead; its
covered scope depends on how (i.e., “as what”: normal
macro, folder hook, hook, account switch) the
macro is invoked.
Inside a call ed macro, the given
positional parameters are implicitly local to the macro's scope, and may
be accessed via the variables *,
@, # and
1 and any other positive unsigned decimal number
less than or equal to #. Positional parameters can
be shift ed, or become completely replaced,
removed etc. via vpospar . A helpful command for
numeric computation and string evaluations is
vexpr , csop offers
C-style byte string operations.
define name {
command1
command2
...
commandN
}
define exmac {
echo Parameter 1 of ${#} is ${1}, all: ${*} / ${@}
return 1000 0
}
call exmac Hello macro exmac!
echo ${?}/${!}/${^ERRNAME}
delete ,
undelete
- (d, u) Marks the given message list as being or not being
‘
deleted ’, respectively; if no
argument has been specified then the usual search for a visible message is
performed, as documented for
Message list arguments,
showing only the next input prompt if the search fails. Deleted messages
will neither be saved in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX nor will they be available for most other
commands. If the autoprint variable is set, the new
“dot” or the last message restored, respectively, is
automatically type d; also see
dp , dt .
digmsg
- [Only new quoting rules] Digging (information out of) messages is possible
through
digmsg objects, which can be
create d for the given message number; in
Compose mode the hyphen-minus
‘- ’ will instead open the message
that is being composed. If a hyphen-minus is given as the optional third
argument then output will be generated on the standard output channel
instead of being subject to consumption by the
readall (or read and
readsh ) command(s). Note: output must be consumed
before normal processing can continue; for digmsg
objects this means each command output has to be read until the end of
file (EOF) state occurs.
The objects may be remove d again by
giving the same identifier used for creation; this step could be
omitted: objects will be automatically closed when the active
folder (mailbox) or the compose mode is left,
respectively. In all other use cases the second argument is an object
identifier, and the third and all following arguments are interpreted as
via ~^ (see
COMMAND ESCAPES):
? vput = msgno; digmsg create $msgno
? digmsg $msgno header list; readall x; echon $x
210 Subject From To Message-ID References In-Reply-To
? digmsg $msgno header show Subject;readall x;echon $x
212 Subject
'Hello, world'
? digmsg remove $msgno
discard
- (di) Identical to
ignore . Superseded by the
multiplexer headerpick .
dp ,
dt
- Delete the given messages and automatically
type
the new “dot” if one exists, regardless of the setting of
autoprint.
dotmove
- Move the “dot” up or down by one message when given
‘
+ ’ or
‘- ’ argument, respectively.
draft ,
undraft
- Take message lists and mark each given message as being draft, or not
being draft, respectively, as documented in the section
Message states.
echo
- [Only new quoting rules](ec) Print the given strings, equivalent to the
shell utility
echo(1),
that is, Shell-style
argument quoting expansion is performed and, different to the
otherwise identical
echon , a trailing newline is
echoed. vput as documented in
Command modifiers is
supported, and the error number ! is managed: if
data is stored in a variable then the return value reflects the length of
the result string in case of success and is
‘-1 ’ on error.
Remarks: this command traditionally (in BSD
Mail) also performed
Filename
transformations, which is standard incompatible and hard to handle
because quoting transformation patterns is not possible; the subcommand
file-expand of vexpr can
be used to expand filenames.
echoerr
- [Only new quoting rules] Identical to
echo , but
the message is written to standard error, and prefixed by
log-prefix. Also see
echoerrn . In interactive sessions the [Option]al
message ring queue for errors will be used
instead, if available and vput was not used.
echon
- [Only new quoting rules] Identical to
echo , but
does not write or store a trailing newline.
echoerrn
- [Only new quoting rules] Identical to
echoerr , but
does not write or store a trailing newline.
edit
- (e) Point the text
EDITOR at each message from the
given list in turn. Modified contents are discarded unless the
writebackedited variable is set, and are not used
unless the mailbox can be written to and the editor returns a successful
exit status. visual can be used instead for a more
display oriented editor.
elif
- Part of the
if (see there for more),
elif , else ,
endif conditional — if the condition of a
preceding if was false, check the following
condition and execute the following block if it evaluates true.
else
- (el) Part of the
if (see there for more),
elif , else ,
endif conditional — if none of the
conditions of the preceding if and
elif commands was true, the
else block is executed.
endif
- (en) Marks the end of an
if (see there for more),
elif , else ,
endif conditional execution block.
environ
- [Only new quoting rules] There is a strict separation in between
INTERNAL VARIABLES and the
program ENVIRONMENT, which is
inherited by child processes. Some variables of the latter are however
vivid for program operation, their purpose is known, therefore they have
been integrated transparently into handling of the former, as accessible
via
set and unset . To
integrate any other environment variable, and/or to export internal
variables into the process environment where they normally are not, a
link needs to become established with this
command, for example
environ link PERL5LIB
TZ
Afterwards changing such variables with
set will cause automatic updates of the
environment, too. Sufficient system support provided (it was in BSD as
early as 1987, and is standardized since Y2K) removing such variables
with unset will remove them also from the
environment, but in any way the knowledge they ever have been
link ed will be lost. This implies that
localopts may cause loss of such links.
The subcommand unlink removes an
existing link without otherwise touching variables, the
set and unset
subcommands are identical to set and
unset , but additionally update the program
environment accordingly; removing a variable breaks any freely
established link .
errors
- [Option] As console user interfaces at times scroll error messages by too
fast and/or out of scope, data can additionally be sent to an error queue
manageable by this command: show or no argument will
display and clear the queue, clear will only clear
it. As the queue becomes filled with errors-limit
entries the eldest entries are being dropped. There are also the variables
^ERRQUEUE-COUNT and
^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS.
eval
- [Only new quoting rules] Construct a command by concatenating the
arguments, separated with a single space character, and then evaluate the
result. This command passes through the exit status
? and error number ! of the
evaluated command; also see
call .
define xxx {
echo "xxx arg <$1>"
shift
if $# -gt 0
\xcall xxx "$@"
endif
}
define yyy {
eval "$@ ' ball"
}
call yyy '\call xxx' "b\$'\t'u ' "
call xxx arg <b u>
call xxx arg < >
call xxx arg <ball>
exit
- (ex or x) Exit from S-nail without changing the active mailbox and skip
any saving of messages in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX , as well as a possibly tracked line editor
history-file. A possibly set
on-account-cleanup will be invoked, however. The
optional status number argument will be passed through to
exit(3).
[v15 behaviour may differ] For now it can happen that the given status
will be overwritten, later this will only occur if a later error needs to
be reported onto an otherwise success indicating status.
File
- (Fi) Like
folder , but open the mailbox
read-only.
file
- (fi) See
folder .
filetype ,
unfiletype
- [Only new quoting rules] Define, list, and remove, respectively, file
handler hooks, which provide (shell) commands that enable S-nail to load
and save MBOX files from and to files with the registered file extensions,
as shown and described for
folder . The extensions
are used case-insensitively, yet the auto-completion feature of for
example folder will only work case-sensitively. An
intermediate temporary file will be used to store the expanded data. The
latter command will remove hooks for all given extensions, asterisk
‘* ’ will remove all existing
handlers.
When used without arguments the former shows a list of all
currently defined file hooks, with one argument the expansion of the
given alias. Otherwise three arguments are expected, the first
specifying the file extension for which the hook is meant, and the
second and third defining the load- and save commands to deal with the
file type, respectively, both of which must read from standard input and
write to standard output. Changing hooks will not affect already opened
mailboxes ([v15 behaviour may differ] except below). [v15 behaviour may
differ] For now too much work is done, and files are oftened read in
twice where once would be sufficient: this can cause problems if a
filetype is changed while such a file is opened; this was already so
with the built-in support of .gz etc. in Heirloom, and will vanish in
v15. [v15 behaviour may differ] For now all handler strings are passed
to the SHELL for evaluation purposes; in the future
a ‘! ’ prefix to load and
save commands may mean to bypass this shell instance: placing a leading
space will avoid any possible misinterpretations.
? filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
? set record=+sent.zst.pgp
flag ,
unflag
- Take message lists and mark the messages as being flagged, or not being
flagged, respectively, for urgent/special attention. See the section
Message states.
Folder
- (Fold) Like
folder , but open the mailbox
read-only.
folder
- (fold) Open a new, or show status information of the current mailbox. If
an argument is given, changes (such as deletions) will be written out, a
new mailbox will be opened, the internal variables
mailbox-resolved and
mailbox-display will be updated, a set according
folder-hook is executed, and optionally a summary of
headers is displayed if the variable
header is set.
Filename
transformations will be applied to the name
argument, and ‘protocol:// ’
prefixes are, i.e., URL (see
On URL syntax
and credential lookup) syntax is understood, as in
‘mbox:///tmp/somefolder ’. If a
protocol prefix is used the mailbox type is fixated, otherwise opening
none-existing folders uses the protocol defined
in newfolders.
For the protocols mbox and
file (MBOX database), as well as
eml (electronic mail message [v15 behaviour may
differ] read-only) the list of all registered
filetype s is traversed to check whether hooks
shall be used to load (and save) data from (and to) the given
name. Changing hooks will not affect already
opened mailboxes. For example, the following creates hooks for the
gzip(1)
compression tool and a combined compressed and encrypted format:
? filetype \
gzip 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
For historic reasons filetype s provide
limited (case-sensitive) auto-completion capabilities. For example
‘mbox.gz ’ will be found for
‘? file mbox ’, provided that
corresponding handlers are installed. It will neither find
‘mbox.GZ ’ nor
‘mbox.Gz ’ however, but an explicit
‘? file mbox.GZ ’ will find and use
the handler for ‘gz ’. [v15
behaviour may differ] The latter mode can only be used for MBOX
files.
EML files consist of only one mail message, [v15 behaviour may
differ] and can only be opened read-only. When reading MBOX files
tolerant POSIX rules are used by default. Invalid message boundaries
that can be found quite often in historic MBOX files will be complained
about (even more with debug): in this case the
method described for mbox-rfc4155 can be used to
create a valid MBOX database from the invalid input.
MBOX databases and EML files will always be protected via
file-region locks
(fcntl(2))
during file operations to protect against concurrent modifications.
[Option] An MBOX inbox
(MAIL ) or
primary system mailbox
will also be protected by so-called dotlock files, the traditional way
of mail spool file locking: for any file
‘x ’ a lock file
‘x.lock ’ will be created during
the synchronization, in the same directory and with the same user and
group identities as the file of interest — as necessary created
by an external privileged dotlock helper.
dotlock-disable disables dotlock files. Also see
FAQ:
Howto handle
stale dotlock files.
[Option] If no protocol has been fixated, and
name refers to a directory with the subdirectories
‘tmp ’,
‘new ’ and
‘cur ’, then it is treated as a
folder in “Maildir” format. The maildir format stores each
message in its own file, and has been designed so that file locking is
not necessary when reading or writing files.
[Option]ally URLs can be used to access network resources,
securely via
Encrypted network
communication, if so supported. Network communication socket
timeouts are configurable via
socket-connect-timeout. All network traffic may be
proxied over a SOCKS server via socks-proxy.
[v15-compat]
protocol://[user[:password]@]host[:port][/path]
[no v15-compat]
protocol://[user@]host[:port][/path]
[Option]ally supported network protocols are
pop3 (POP3) and pop3s (POP3
with TLS encrypted transport), imap and
imaps. The [/path] part is
valid only for IMAP; there it defaults to INBOX.
Network URLs require a special encoding as documented in the section
On URL syntax
and credential lookup.
folders
- Lists the names of all folders below the given argument or
folder. For file-based protocols
LISTER will be used for display purposes.
Followup ,
followup
- (Compose mode)(F,fo) Similar to
Reply , and
reply , respectively, but save the message in a
file named after the local part of the (first) recipient's address,
possibly overwriting record, and honouring
outfolder. Also see Copy and
Save .
Forward
- (Compose mode) Similar to
forward , but saves the
message in a file named after the local part of the recipient's address
(instead of in record).
forward
- (Compose mode) Take a message list and the address of a recipient, subject
to fullnames, to whom the messages are sent. The
text of the original message is included in the new one, enclosed by the
values of forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail.
content-description-forwarded-message is inspected.
The list of included headers can be filtered with the
‘
forward ’ slot of the white- and
blacklisting command headerpick . Only the first
part of a multipart message is included but for
forward-as-attachment.
This may generate the errors
^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been
specified, or was rejected by expandaddr policy,
^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set
conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of
Specifying messages. Any
error stops processing of further messages.
from
- (f) Takes a list of message specifications and displays a summary of their
message headers, exactly as via
headers , making
the first message of the result the new “dot” (the last
message if showlast is set). An alias of this
command is search . Also see
Specifying messages.
Fwd
- [Obsolete] Alias for
Forward .
fwd
- [Obsolete] Alias for
forward .
fwdignore
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
fwdretain
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
ghost ,
unghost
- [Obsolete] Replaced by
commandalias ,
uncommandalias .
- ,
unheaderpick
- [Only new quoting rules] Multiplexer command to manage white- and
blacklisting selections of header fields for a variety of applications.
Without arguments the set of contexts that have settings is displayed.
When given arguments, the first argument is the context to which the
command applies, one of (case-insensitive)
‘
type ’ for display purposes (for
example type ),
‘save ’ for selecting which headers
shall be stored persistently when save ,
copy , move or even
decrypt ing messages (note that MIME related etc.
header fields should not be ignored in order to not destroy usability of
the message in this case), ‘forward ’
for stripping down messages when forward ing
message (has no effect if forward-as-attachment is
set), and ‘top ’ for defining
user-defined set of fields for the command top .
The current settings of the given context are displayed if it
is the only argument. A second argument denotes the type of restriction
that is to be chosen, it may be (a case-insensitive prefix of)
‘retain ’ or
‘ignore ’ for white- and
blacklisting purposes, respectively. Establishing a whitelist suppresses
inspection of the corresponding blacklist.
If no further argument is given the current settings of the
given type will be displayed, otherwise the remaining arguments specify
header fields, which [Option]ally may be given as regular expressions,
to be added to the given type. The special wildcard field (asterisk,
‘* ’) will establish a (fast)
shorthand setting which covers all fields.
The latter command always takes three or more arguments and
can be used to remove selections, i.e., from the given context, the
given type of list, all the given headers will be removed, the special
argument ‘* ’ will remove all
headers.
- (h) Show the current group of headers, the size of which depends on the
variable screen in interactive mode, and the format
of which can be defined with headline. If a
message-specification is given the group of headers containing the first
message therein is shown and the message at the top of the screen becomes
the new “dot”; the last message is targeted if
showlast is set.
help
- (hel) A synonym for
? .
history
- [Option] Without arguments or when given
show all
history entries are shown (this mode also supports a more
verbose output). load will
replace the list of entries with the content of
history-file, and save will
dump all entries to said file, replacing former content, and
clear will delete all entries. The argument can
also be a signed decimal NUMBER, which will select
and evaluate the respective history entry, and move it to the top of the
history; a negative number is used as an offset to the current command so
that ‘-1 ’ will select the last
command, the history top, whereas delete will
delete all given entries (:NUMBER:). Also see
On terminal
control and line editor.
hold
- (ho, also
preserve ) Takes a message list and marks
each message therein to be saved in the user's system
inbox instead of in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX . Does not override the
delete command. S-nail deviates from the POSIX
standard with this command, because a next command
issued after hold will display the following
message, not the current one.
if
- (i) Part of the
if , elif ,
else , endif conditional
execution construct — if the given condition is true then the
encapsulated block is executed. The POSIX standard only supports the
(case-insensitive) conditions
‘r ’eceive and
‘s ’end, the remaining are
non-portable extensions. [v15 behaviour may differ] In conjunction with
the wysh command prefix(es)
Shell-style argument
quoting and more test operators are available.
if receive
commands ...
else
commands ...
endif
Further (case-insensitive) one-argument conditions are
‘t ’erminal which evaluates to true
in interactive terminal sessions (running with standard input or
standard output attached to a terminal, and none of the
“quickrun” command line options
-e , -H and
-L have been used), as well as any boolean value
(see INTERNAL VARIABLES for
textual boolean representations) to mark an enwrapped block as
“never execute” or “always execute”.
(Remarks: condition syntax errors skip all branches until
endif .)
[no v15-compat] and without wysh : It
is possible to check INTERNAL
VARIABLES as well as
ENVIRONMENT variables for
existence or compare their expansion against a user given value or
another variable by using the ‘$ ’
(“variable next”) conditional trigger character; a
variable on the right hand side may be signalled using the same
mechanism. Variable names may be enclosed in a pair of matching braces.
When this mode has been triggered, several operators are available
([v15-compat] and wysh : they are always
available, and there is no trigger: variables will have been expanded by
the shell-compatible parser before the if etc.
command sees them).
[v15-compat] Two argument conditions. Variables can be tested
for existence and expansion: ‘-N ’
will test whether the given variable exists, so that
‘-N editalong ’ will evaluate to
true when editalong is set, whereas
‘-Z editalong ’ will if it is not.
‘-n "$editalong" ’ will
be true if the variable is set and expands to a non-empty string,
‘-z $'\$editalong' ’ only if the
expansion is empty, whether the variable exists or not. The remaining
conditions take three arguments.
Integer operators treat the arguments on the left and right
hand side of the operator as integral numbers and compare them
arithmetically. It is an error if any of the operands is not a valid
integer, an empty argument (which implies it had been quoted) is treated
as if it were 0. Via the question mark
‘? ’ modifier suffix a saturated
operation mode is available where numbers will linger at the minimum or
maximum possible value, instead of overflowing (or trapping), the
keyword ‘saturated ’ is optional,
‘==? ’,
‘==?satu ’ and
‘==?saturated ’ are therefore
identical. Available operators are
‘-lt ’ (less than),
‘-le ’ (less than or equal to),
‘-eq ’ (equal),
‘-ne ’ (not equal),
‘-ge ’ (greater than or equal to),
and ‘-gt ’ (greater than).
String and regular expression data operators compare the left
and right hand side according to their textual content. Unset variables
are treated as the empty string. Via the question mark
‘? ’ modifier suffix a
case-insensitive operation mode is available, the keyword
‘case ’ is optional,
‘==? ’ and
‘==?case ’ are identical.
Available string operators are
‘< ’ (less than),
‘<= ’ (less than or equal to),
‘== ’ (equal),
‘!= ’ (not equal),
‘>= ’ (greater than or equal
to), ‘> ’ (greater than),
‘=% ’ (is substring of) and
‘!% ’ (is not substring of). By
default these operators work on bytes and (therefore) do not take into
account character set specifics. If the case-insensitivity modifier has
been used, case is ignored according to the rules of the US-ASCII
encoding, i.e., bytes are still compared.
When the [Option]al regular expression support is available,
the additional string operators
‘=~ ’ and
‘!~ ’ can be used. They treat the
right hand side as an extended regular expression that is matched
according to the active locale (see
Character sets), i.e.,
character sets should be honoured correctly.
Conditions can be joined via AND-OR lists (where the AND
operator is ‘&& ’ and the
OR operator is ‘|| ’), which have
equal precedence and will be evaluated with left associativity, thus
using the same syntax that is known for the
sh(1).
It is also possible to form groups of conditions and lists by enclosing
them in pairs of brackets
‘[ ... ] ’, which may
be interlocked within each other, and also be joined via AND-OR
lists.
The results of individual conditions and entire groups may be
modified via unary operators: the unary operator
‘! ’ will reverse the result.
wysh set v15-compat=yes # with value: automatic "wysh"!
if -N debug;echo *debug* set;else;echo not;endif
if "$ttycharset" == UTF-8 || "$ttycharset" ==?cas UTF8
echo ttycharset is UTF-8, the former case-sensitive!
endif
set t1=one t2=one
if [ "${t1}" == "${t2}" ]
echo These two variables are equal
endif
if "$features" =% ,+regex, && "$TERM" =~?case ^xterm.*
echo ..in an X terminal
endif
if [ [ true ] && [ [ "${debug}" != '' ] || \
[ "$verbose" != '' ] ] ]
echo Noisy, noisy
endif
if true && [ -n "$debug" || -n "${verbose}" ]
echo Left associativity, as is known from the shell
endif
ignore
- (ig) Identical to
discard . Superseded by the
multiplexer headerpick .
list
- Shows the names of all available commands, in command lookup order.
[Option] In conjunction with a set variable verbose
additional information will be provided for each command: the argument
type will be indicated, the documentation string will be shown, and the
set of command flags will show up:
- ‘
`local' ’
- command supports the command modifier
local .
- ‘
`vput' ’
- command supports the command modifier
vput .
- ‘
*!* ’
- the error number is tracked in !.
- ‘
needs-box ’
- whether the command needs an active mailbox, a
folder .
- ‘
ok: ’
- indicators whether command is ...
- ‘
batch/interactive ’
- usable in interactive or batch mode
(
-# ).
- ‘
send-mode ’
- usable in send mode.
- ‘
subprocess ’
- allowed to be used when running in a subprocess instance, for
example from within a macro that is called via
on-compose-splice.
- ‘
not ok: ’
- indicators whether command is not ...
- ‘
compose mode ’
- available in Compose
mode.
- ‘
startup ’
- available during program startup, like in
Resource files.
- ‘
gabby ’
- The command produces history-gabby
history entries.
localopts
- Enforce change localization of
environ (linked)
ENVIRONMENT as well as (global)
INTERNAL VARIABLES, meaning
that their state will be reverted to the former one once the
“covered scope” is left. Just like the command modifier
local , which provides block-scope localization for
some commands (instead), it can only be used inside of macro definition
blocks introduced by account or
define . The covered scope of an
account is left once a different account is
activated, and some macros, notably folder-hooks,
use their own specific notion of covered scope, here it will be extended
until the folder is left again.
This setting stacks up: i.e., if
‘macro1 ’ enables change
localization and calls ‘macro2 ’,
which explicitly resets localization, then any value changes within
‘macro2 ’ will still be reverted
when the scope of ‘macro1 ’ is
left. (Caveats: if in this example
‘macro2 ’ changes to a different
account which sets some variables that are
already covered by localizations, their scope will be extended, and in
fact leaving the account will (thus) restore
settings in (likely) global scope which actually were defined in a
local, macro private context!)
This command takes one or two arguments, the optional first
one specifies an attribute that may be one of
scope , which refers to the current scope and is
thus the default, call , which causes any macro
that is being call ed to be started with
localization enabled by default, as well as
call-fixate , which (if enabled) disallows any
called macro to turn off localization: like this it can be ensured that
once the current scope regains control, any changes made in deeper
levels have been reverted. The latter two are mutually exclusive, and
neither affects xcall . The (second) argument is
interpreted as a boolean (string, see
INTERNAL VARIABLES) and
states whether the given attribute shall be turned on or off.
define temporary_settings {
set possibly_global_option1
localopts on
set localized_option1
set localized_option2
localopts scope off
set possibly_global_option2
}
Lfollowup ,
Lreply
- (Compose mode) Reply to messages that come in via known
(
mlist ) or subscribed
(mlsubscribe ) mailing lists, or pretend to do so
(see Mailing lists): on top of the
usual followup and reply ,
respectively, functionality this will actively resort and even remove
message recipients in order to generate a message that is supposed to be
sent to a mailing list. For example it will also implicitly generate a
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ header if that
seems useful, regardless of the setting of the variable
followup-to. For more documentation please refer to
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors
^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been
specified, ^ERR-PERM if some addressees where
rejected by expandaddr,
^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set
conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of
Specifying messages.
Occurrence of some of the errors depend on the value of
expandaddr. Any error stops processing of further
messages.
Mail
- (Compose mode) Similar to
mail , but saves the
message in a file named after the local part of the first recipient's
address (instead of in record).
mail
- (Compose mode)(m) Takes a (list of) recipient address(es) as (an)
argument(s), or asks on standard input if none were given; then collects
the remaining mail content and sends it out. Unless the internal variable
fullnames is set recipient addresses will be
stripped from comments, names etc. For more documentation please refer to
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors
^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been
specified, ^ERR-PERM if some addressees where
rejected by expandaddr,
^ERR-NOTSUP if multiple messages have been
specified, ^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set
conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of
Specifying messages.
Occurrence of some of the errors depend on the value of
expandaddr.
mailcap
- [Option] When used without arguments or if show has
been given the content of The
Mailcap files cache is shown, (re-)initializing it first (as
necessary. If the argument is load then the cache
will only be (re-)initialized, and clear will remove
its contents. Note that S-nail will try to load the files only once, use
‘
mailcap clear ’
to unlock further attempts. Loading and parsing can be made more
verbose.
mbox
- (mb) The given message list is to be sent to the
secondary mailbox
MBOX when S-nail is quit; this is the default
action unless the variable hold is set. [v15
behaviour may differ] This command can only be used in a
primary system
mailbox.
mimetype ,
unmimetype
- [Only new quoting rules] Without arguments the content of the MIME type
cache will displayed; a more verbose listing will be produced if either of
debug or verbose are set. When
given arguments they will be joined, interpreted as shown in
The mime.types files (also
see HTML mail and
MIME attachments), and the resulting entry will be added (prepended)
to the cache. In any event MIME type sources are loaded first as necessary
– mimetypes-load-control can be used to
fine-tune which sources are actually loaded.
The latter command deletes all specifications of the given
MIME type, thus ‘? unmimetype
text/plain ’ will remove all registered specifications for
the MIME type ‘text/plain ’. The
special name ‘* ’ will discard all
existing MIME types, just as will
‘reset ’, but which also reenables
cache initialization via
mimetypes-load-control.
mimeview
- [v15 behaviour may differ] Only available in interactive mode, this
command allows execution of external MIME type handlers which do not
integrate into the normal
type output (see
HTML mail and MIME
attachments). ([v15 behaviour may differ] No syntax to directly
address parts, this restriction may vanish.) The user will be asked for
each non-text part of the given message in turn whether the registered
handler shall be used to display the part.
mlist ,
unmlist
- [Only new quoting rules] Manage the list of known
Mailing lists; subscriptions are
controlled via
mlsubscribe . The latter command
deletes all given arguments, or all at once when given the asterisk
‘* ’. The former shows the list of
all currently known lists if used without arguments, otherwise the given
arguments will become known. [Option] In the latter case, arguments which
contain any of the
magic regular
expression characters will be interpreted as one, possibly matching
many addresses; these will be sequentially matched via linked lists
instead of being looked up in a dictionary.
mlsubscribe ,
unmlsubscribe
- Building upon the command pair
mlist ,
unmlist , but only managing the subscription
attribute of mailing lists. (The former will also create not yet existing
mailing lists.)
Move
- Similar to
move , but move the messages to a file
named after the local part of the sender of the first message instead of
taking a filename argument; outfolder is inspected
to decide on the actual storage location.
move
- Acts like
copy but marks the messages for deletion
if they were transferred successfully.
More
- Like
more , but also displays header fields which
would not pass the headerpick selection, and all
MIME parts. Identical to Page .
more
- Invokes the
PAGER on the given messages, even in
non-interactive mode and as long as the standard output is a terminal.
Identical to page .
mtaaliases
- [Option] When used without arguments or if show has
been given the content of the mta-aliases cache is
shown, (re-)initializing it first (as necessary). If the argument is
load then the cache will only be (re-)initialized,
and clear will remove its contents.
netrc
- [Option] When used without arguments, or when the argument was
show the content of the
~/.netrc cache is shown, initializing it as
necessary. If the argument is load then the cache
will be (re)loaded, whereas clear removes it.
Loading and parsing can be made more verbose.
lookup will query the cache for the URL given as the
second argument (‘
[USER@]HOST ’). See
netrc-lookup, netrc-pipe and
the section On
URL syntax and credential lookup; the section
The .netrc file documents the
file format in detail.
newmail
- Checks for new mail in the current folder without committing any changes
before. If new mail is present, a message is shown. If the
header variable is set, the headers of each new
message are also shown. This command is not available for all mailbox
types.
next
- (n) (like ‘
+ ’ or
“ENTER”) Goes to the next message in sequence and types it.
With an argument list, types the next matching message.
New
- Same as
Unread .
new
- Same as
unread .
noop
- If the current folder is accessed via a network connection, a
“NOOP” command is sent, otherwise no operation is
performed.
Page
- Like
page , but also displays header fields which
would not pass the headerpick selection, and all
MIME parts. Identical to More .
page
- Invokes the
PAGER on the given messages, even in
non-interactive mode and as long as the standard output is a terminal.
Identical to more .
Pipe
- Like
pipe but also pipes header fields which would
not pass the headerpick selection, and all parts
of MIME ‘multipart/alternative ’
messages.
pipe
- (pi) Takes an optional message list and shell command (that defaults to
cmd), and pipes the messages through the command. If
the page variable is set, every message is followed
by a formfeed character.
preserve
- (pre) A synonym for
hold .
Print
- (P) Alias for
Type .
print
- (p) Research UNIX equivalent of
type .
quit
- (q) Terminates the session, saving all undeleted, unsaved messages in the
current secondary mailbox
MBOX , preserving all messages marked with
hold or preserve or never
referenced in the system inbox, and removing all
other messages from the
primary system mailbox.
If new mail has arrived during the session, the message “You have
new mail” will be shown. If given while editing a mailbox file with
the command line option -f , then the edit file is
rewritten. A return to the shell is effected, unless the rewrite of edit
file fails, in which case the user can escape with the exit command. The
optional status number argument will be passed through to
exit(3).
[v15 behaviour may differ] For now it can happen that the given status
will be overwritten, later this will only occur if a later error needs to
be reported onto an otherwise success indicating status.
read
- [Only new quoting rules] Read a line from standard input, or the channel
set active via
readctl , and assign the data, which
will be split as indicated by ifs, to the given
variables. The variable names are checked by the same rules as documented
for vput , and the same error codes will be seen in
!; the exit status ? indicates
the number of bytes read, it will be
‘-1 ’ with the error number
! set to ^ERR-BADF in case of
I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE upon End-Of-File. If there
are more fields than variables, assigns successive fields to the last
given variable. If there are less fields than variables, assigns the empty
string to the remains.
? read a b c
H e l l o
? echo "<$a> <$b> <$c>"
<H> <e> <l l o>
? wysh set ifs=:; read a b c;unset ifs
hey2.0,:"'you ",:world!:mars.:
? echo $?/$^ERRNAME / <$a><$b><$c>
0/NONE / <hey2.0,><"'you ",><world!:mars.:><><>
readsh
- [Only new quoting rules] Like
read , but splits on
shell token boundaries (see
Shell-style argument
quoting) rather than at ifs. [v15 behaviour may
differ] Could become a commandalias , maybe
‘read --tokenize -- ’.
readall
- [Only new quoting rules] Read anything from standard input, or the channel
set active via
readctl , and assign the data to the
given variable. The variable name is checked by the same rules as
documented for vput , and the same error codes will
be seen in !; the exit status
? indicates the number of bytes read, it will be
‘-1 ’ with the error number
! set to ^ERR-BADF in case of
I/O errors, or ^ERR-NONE upon End-Of-File. [v15
behaviour may differ] The input data length is restricted to 31-bits.
readctl
- [Only new quoting rules] Manages input channels for
read , readsh and
readall , to be used to avoid complicated or
impracticable code, like calling read from within
a macro in non-interactive mode. Without arguments, or when the first
argument is show , a listing of all known channels
is printed. Channels can otherwise be create d, and
existing channels can be set active and
remove d by giving the string used for creation.
The channel name is expected to be a file descriptor number,
or, if parsing the numeric fails, an input file name that undergoes
Filename
transformations. For example (this example requires a modern
shell):
$ printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\nyou\necho $a' |\
s-nail -R#
hey, you
$ LC_ALL=C printf 'echon "hey, "\nread a\necho $a' |\
LC_ALL=C 6<<< 'you' s-nail -R#X'readctl create 6'
hey, you
remove
- [Only new quoting rules] Removes the named files or directories. If a name
refers to a mailbox, say a Maildir mailbox, then a mailbox type specific
removal will be performed, deleting the complete mailbox. In interactive
mode the user is asked for confirmation.
rename
- [Only new quoting rules] Takes the name of an existing folder and the name
for the new folder and renames the first to the second one.
Filename
transformations including shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions
(glob(7))
are performed on both arguments. Both folders must be of the same
type.
Reply ,
Respond
- (Compose mode)(R) Identical to
reply except that
it replies to only the sender of each message of the given list, by using
the first message as the template to quote, for the
‘Subject: ’ etc.; setting
flipr will exchange this command with
reply .
reply ,
respond
- (Compose mode)(r) Take a message (list) and group-respond (to each in
turn) by addressing the sender and all recipients, subject to
fullnames and
alternates
processing. followup-to,
followup-to-honour,
reply-to-honour as well as
recipients-in-cc influence response behaviour.
quote as well as
quote-as-attachment configure whether responded-to
message shall be quoted etc.,
content-description-quote-attachment may be used.
Setting flipr will exchange this command with
Reply . The command Lreply
offers special support for replying to mailing lists. For more
documentation please refer to
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode.
This may generate the errors
^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been
specified, or was rejected by expandaddr policy,
^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set
conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of
Specifying messages. Any
error stops processing of further messages.
Resend
- Like
resend , but does not add any header lines.
This is not a way to hide the sender's identity, but useful for sending a
message again to the same recipients.
resend
- Takes a list of messages and a name, and sends each message to the given
addressee, which is subject to fullnames.
‘
Resent-From: ’ and related header
fields are prepended to the new copy of the message. Saving in
record is only performed if
record-resent is set. [v15 behaviour may
differ](Compose mode) is not entered, the only supported hooks are
on-resend-enter and
on-resend-cleanup.
This may generate the errors
^ERR-DESTADDRREQ if no receiver has been
specified, or was rejected by expandaddr policy,
^ERR-IO if an I/O error occurs,
^ERR-NOTSUP if a necessary character set
conversion fails, and ^ERR-INVAL for other errors.
It can also fail with errors of
Specifying messages. Any
error stops processing of further messages.
retain
- (ret) Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
return
- Only available inside of a
define d macro or an
account , this command returns control of execution
to the outer scope. The two optional parameters are positive decimal
numbers and default to 0: the first specifies the 32-bit return value
(stored in ? [v15 behaviour may differ] and later
extended to 64-bit), the second the 32-bit error number (stored in
!). As documented for ? a
non-0 exit status may cause the program to exit.
Save
- (S) Similar to
save, but saves the messages in a
file named after the local part of the sender of the first message instead
of taking a filename argument; outfolder is
inspected to decide on the actual storage location.
save
- (s) Takes a message list and a filename and appends each message in turn
to the end of the file.
Filename
transformations including shell pathname wildcard pattern expansions
(glob(7))
is performed on the filename. If no filename is given, the
secondary mailbox
MBOX is used. The filename in quotes, followed by
the generated character count is echoed on the user's terminal. If editing
a primary system mailbox
the messages are marked for deletion. To filter the saved header fields to
the desired subset use the ‘save ’
slot of the white- and blacklisting command
headerpick . Also see
Copy .
savediscard
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
saveignore
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
saveretain
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
search
- Takes a message specification (list) and displays a header summary of all
matching messages, as via
headers . This command is
an alias of from . Also see
Specifying messages.
seen
- Takes a message list and marks all messages as having been read.
set ,
unset
- (se, [Only new quoting rules] uns) The latter command will delete all
given global variables, or only block-scope local ones if the
local command modifier has been used. The former,
when used without arguments, will show all currently known variables,
being more verbose if either of debug or
verbose is set. Remarks: this list mode will not
automatically link-in (known)
ENVIRONMENT variables, this only
happens for explicit addressing, examples are
varshow , using a variable in an
if condition or a string passed to
echo , explicit set ting, as
well as some program-internal use cases (look-ups).
Otherwise the given variables (and arguments) are set or
adjusted. Arguments are of the form
‘name=value ’ (no space before or
after ‘= ’), or plain
‘name ’ if there is no value, i.e.,
a boolean variable. If a name begins with
‘no ’, as in
‘set nosave ’, the effect is the
same as invoking the unset command with the
remaining part of the variable (‘unset
save ’). [v15 behaviour may differ] In conjunction with the
wysh (or local )
command prefix(es)
Shell-style argument
quoting can be used to quote arguments as necessary. [v15 behaviour
may differ] Otherwise quotation marks may be placed around any part of
the assignment statement to quote blanks or tabs.
When operating in global scope any
‘name ’ that is known to map to an
environment variable will automatically cause updates in the program
environment (unsetting a variable in the environment requires
corresponding system support) — use the command
environ for further environmental control. If
the command modifier local has been used to
enforce local scoping then the given user variables will be garbage
collected when the local scope is left; for
INTERNAL VARIABLES,
however, local behaves the same as if
localopts would have been set (temporarily),
which means that changes are inherited by deeper scopes. Also see
varshow and the sections
INTERNAL VARIABLES and
ENVIRONMENT.
? wysh set indentprefix=' -> '
? wysh set atab=$'' aspace=' ' zero=0
shcodec
- Apply shell quoting rules to the given raw-data arguments. Supports
vput (see
Command modifiers). The first
argument specifies the operation: [+]e[ncode] or
d[ecode] cause shell quoting to be applied to the
remains of the line, and expanded away thereof, respectively. If the
former is prefixed with a plus-sign, the quoted result will not be
roundtrip enabled, and thus can be decoded only in the very same
environment that was used to perform the encode; also see
mle-quote-rndtrip . If the coding operation fails
the error number ! is set to
^ERR-CANCELED, and the unmodified input is used as
the result; the error number may change again due to output or result
storage errors.
shell
- [Only new quoting rules] (sh) Invokes an interactive version of the shell,
and returns its exit status.
shortcut ,
unshortcut
- [Only new quoting rules] Manage the file- or pathname shortcuts as
documented for
folder . The latter command deletes
all shortcuts given as arguments, or all at once when given the asterisk
‘* ’. The former shows the list of
all currently defined shortcuts if used without arguments, the target of
the given with a single argument. Otherwise arguments are treated as pairs
of shortcuts and their desired expansion, creating new or updating already
existing ones.
shift
- [Only new quoting rules] Shift the positional parameter stack (starting at
1) by the given number (which must be a positive
decimal), or 1 if no argument has been given. It is an error if the value
exceeds the number of positional parameters. If the given number is 0, no
action is performed, successfully. The stack as such can be managed via
vpospar . Note this command will fail in
account and hook macros unless the positional
parameter stack has been explicitly created in the current context via
vpospar .
show
- Like
type , but performs neither MIME decoding nor
decryption, so that the raw message text is shown.
size
- (si) Shows the size in characters of each message of the given message
list.
sleep
- [Only new quoting rules] Sleep for the specified number of seconds (and
optionally milliseconds), by default interruptible. If a third argument is
given the sleep will be uninterruptible, otherwise the error number
! will be set to ^ERR-INTR if
the sleep has been interrupted. The command will fail and the error number
will be ^ERR-OVERFLOW if the given duration(s)
overflow the time datatype, and ^ERR-INVAL if the
given durations are no valid integers.
sort ,
unsort
- The latter command disables sorted or threaded mode, returns to normal
message order and, if the header variable is set,
displays a header summary. The former command shows the current sorting
criterion when used without an argument, but creates a sorted
representation of the current folder otherwise, and changes the
next command and the addressing modes such that
they refer to messages in the sorted order. Message numbers are the same
as in regular mode. If the header variable is set, a
header summary in the new order is also displayed. Automatic folder
sorting can be enabled by setting the autosort
variable, as in ‘set
autosort=thread ’. Possible sorting criterions are:
- date
- Sort the messages by their
‘
Date: ’ field, that is by the
time they were sent.
- from
- Sort messages by the value of their
‘
From: ’ field, that is by the
address of the sender. If the showname variable
is set, the sender's real name (if any) is used.
- size
- Sort the messages by their size.
- spam
- [Option] Sort the message by their spam score, as has been classified
by
spamrate .
- status
- Sort the messages by their message status.
- subject
- Sort the messages by their subject.
- thread
- Create a threaded display.
- to
- Sort messages by the value of their
‘
To: ’ field, that is by the
address of the recipient. If the showname
variable is set, the recipient's real name (if any) is used.
source
- [Only new quoting rules] (so) The source command reads commands from the
given file. Filename
transformations will be applied. If the given expanded argument ends
with a vertical bar ‘
| ’ then the
argument will instead be interpreted as a shell command and S-nail will
read the output generated by it. Dependent on the settings of
posix and errexit, and also
dependent on whether the command modifier ignerr
had been used, encountering errors will stop sourcing of the given input.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Note that source cannot
be used from within macros that execute as
folder-hooks or account s,
i.e., it can only be called from macros that were
call ed.
source_if
- [Only new quoting rules] The difference to
source
(beside not supporting pipe syntax aka shell command input) is that this
command will not generate an error nor warn if the given file argument
cannot be opened successfully.
spamclear
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and clears their
‘
is-spam ’ flag.
spamforget
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and causes the
spam-interface to forget it has ever used them to
train its Bayesian filter. Unless otherwise noted the
‘
is-spam ’ flag of the message is
inspected to chose whether a message shall be forgotten to be
“ham” or “spam”.
spamham
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of the
spam-interface that they are “ham”.
This also clears the ‘
is-spam ’ flag
of the messages in question.
spamrate
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and rates them using the configured
spam-interface, without modifying the messages, but
setting their ‘
is-spam ’ flag as
appropriate; because the spam rating headers are lost the rate will be
forgotten once the mailbox is left. Refer to the manual section
Handling spam for the complete
picture of spam handling in S-nail.
spamset
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and sets their
‘
is-spam ’ flag.
spamspam
- [Option] Takes a list of messages and informs the Bayesian filter of the
spam-interface that they are “spam”.
This also sets the ‘
is-spam ’ flag of
the messages in question.
thread
- [Obsolete] The same as ‘
sort thread ’
(consider using a ‘commandalias ’ as
necessary).
tls
- [Only new quoting rules] TLS information and management command
multiplexer to aid in
Encrypted network
communication, mostly available only if the term
‘
,+sockets, ’ is included in
features. Commands support
vput if so documented (see
Command modifiers). The result
that is shown in case of errors is always the empty string, errors can be
identified via the error number !. For example,
string length overflows are caught and set ! to
^ERR-OVERFLOW. The TLS configuration is honoured,
especially tls-verify.
? vput tls result fingerprint pop3s://ex.am.ple
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME: $result
certchain
- Show the complete verified peer certificate chain. Includes
informational fields in conjunction with
verbose.
certificate
- Show only the peer certificate, without any signers. Includes
informational fields in conjunction with
verbose.
fingerprint
- Show the tls-fingerprint-digested fingerprint of
the certificate of the given HOST
(‘
server:port ’, where the port
defaults to the HTTPS port, 443).
tls-fingerprint is actively ignored for the
runtime of this command.
Top
- Like
top but always uses the
headerpick
‘type ’ slot for white- and
blacklisting header fields.
top
- (to) Takes a message list and types out the first
toplines lines of each message on the user's
terminal. Unless a special selection has been established for the
‘
top ’ slot of the
headerpick command, the only header fields that
are displayed are ‘From: ’,
‘To: ’,
‘Cc: ’, and
‘Subject: ’.
Top will always use the
‘type ’
headerpick selection instead. It is possible to
apply compression to what is displayed by setting
topsqueeze. Messages are decrypted and converted to
the terminal character set if necessary.
touch
- (tou) Takes a message list and marks the messages for saving in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX . S-nail deviates from the POSIX standard with
this command, as a following next command will
display the following message instead of the current one.
Type
- (T) Like
type but also displays header fields
which would not pass the headerpick selection, and
all visualizable parts of MIME
‘multipart/alternative ’
messages.
type
- (t) Takes a message list and types out each message on the user's
terminal. The display of message headers is selectable via
headerpick . For MIME multipart messages, all parts
with a content type of ‘text ’, all
parts which have a registered MIME type handler (see
HTML mail and MIME
attachments) which produces plain text output, and all
‘message ’ parts are shown, others
are hidden except for their headers. Messages are decrypted and converted
to the terminal character set if necessary. The command
mimeview can be used to display parts which are
not displayable as plain text.
unaccount
- See
account .
unalias
- (una) See
alias .
unanswered
- See
answered .
unbind
- See
bind .
uncollapse
- See
collapse .
uncolour
- See
colour .
undefine
- See
define .
undelete
- See
delete .
undraft
- See
draft .
unflag
- See
flag .
unfwdignore
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unfwdretain
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unignore
- Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unmimetype
- See
mimetype .
unmlist
- See
mlist .
unmlsubscribe
- See
mlsubscribe .
Unread
- Same as
unread .
unread
- Takes a message list and marks each message as not having been read.
unretain
- Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unsaveignore
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unsaveretain
- [Obsolete] Superseded by the multiplexer
headerpick .
unset
- [Only new quoting rules] (uns) See
set .
unshortcut
- See
shortcut .
unsort
- See
short .
unthread
- [Obsolete] Same as
unsort .
urlcodec
- Perform URL percent codec operations on the raw-data argument, rather
according to RFC 3986. The first argument specifies the operation:
e[ncode] or d[ecode] perform
plain URL percent en- and decoding, respectively.
p[ath]enc[ode] and
p[ath]dec[ode] perform a slightly modified operation
which should be better for pathnames: it does not allow a tilde
‘
~ ’, and will neither accept
hyphen-minus ‘- ’ nor dot
‘ ’. as an initial character. The
remains of the line form the URL data which is to be converted. This is a
character set agnostic operation, and it may thus decode bytes which are
invalid in the current ttycharset.
Supports vput (see
Command modifiers), and
manages the error number !. If the coding
operation fails the error number ! is set to
^ERR-CANCELED, and the unmodified input is used as
the result; the error number may change again due to output or result
storage errors. [v15 behaviour may differ] This command does not know
about URLs beside what is documented. (vexpr
offers a makeprint subcommand, shall the URL be
displayed.)
varshow
- [Only new quoting rules] This command produces the same output as the
listing mode of
set , including
verboseity adjustments, but only for the given
variables.
verify
- [Option] Takes a message list and verifies each message. If a message is
not a S/MIME signed message, verification will fail for it. The
verification process checks if the message was signed using a valid
certificate, if the message sender's email address matches one of those
contained within the certificate, and if the message content has been
altered.
version
- Shows the version and features
of S-nail, optionally in a more verbose form which
also includes the build and running system environment. This command
supports
vput (see
Command modifiers).
vexpr
- [Only new quoting rules] A multiplexer command which offers signed 64-bit
numeric calculations, as well as other, mostly string-based operations.
C-style byte string operations are available via
csop . The first argument defines the number, type,
and meaning of the remaining arguments. An empty number argument is
treated as 0. Supports vput (see
Command modifiers). The result
shown in case of errors is ‘-1 ’ for
usage errors and numeric operations, the empty string otherwise;
“soft” errors, like when a search operation failed, will
also set the ! error number to
^ERR-NODATA. Except when otherwise noted numeric
arguments are parsed as signed 64-bit numbers, and errors will be reported
in the error number ! as the numeric error
^ERR-RANGE.
Numeric operations work on one or two signed 64-bit integers.
Numbers prefixed with ‘0x ’ or
‘0X ’ are interpreted as
hexadecimal (base 16) numbers, whereas
‘0 ’ indicates octal (base 8), and
‘0b ’ as well as
‘0B ’ denote binary (base 2)
numbers. It is possible to use any base in between 2 and 36, inclusive,
with the ‘BASE#number ’ notation,
where the base is given as an unsigned decimal number, so
‘16#AFFE ’ is a different way of
specifying a hexadecimal number. Unsigned interpretation of a number can
be enforced by prefixing an ‘u ’
(case-insensitively), as in
‘u-110 ’; this is not necessary for
power-of-two bases (2, 4, 8, 16 and 32), which will be interpreted as
unsigned by default, but it still makes a difference regarding overflow
detection and overflow constant. It is possible to enforce signed
interpretation by (instead) prefixing a
‘s ’ (case-insensitively). The
number sign notation uses a permissive parse mode and as such supports
complicated conditions out of the box:
? wysh set ifs=:;read i;unset ifs;echo $i;vexpr pb 2 10#$i
-009
< -009>
0b1001
One integer is expected by assignment (equals sign
‘= ’), which does nothing but
parsing the argument, thus detecting validity and possible overflow
conditions, unary not (tilde ‘~ ’),
which creates the bitwise complement, and unary plus and minus. Two
integers are used by addition (plus sign
‘+ ’), subtraction (hyphen-minus
‘- ’), multiplication (asterisk
‘* ’), division (solidus
‘/ ’) and modulo (percent sign
‘% ’), as well as for the bitwise
operators logical or (vertical bar
‘| ’, to be quoted) , bitwise and
(ampersand ‘& ’, to be quoted)
, bitwise xor (circumflex ‘^ ’),
the bitwise signed left- and right shifts
(‘<< ’,
‘>> ’), as well as for the
unsigned right shift
‘>>> ’.
Another numeric operation is pbase ,
which takes a number base in between 2 and 36, inclusive, and will act
on the second number given just the same as what equals sign
‘= ’ does, but the number result
will be formatted in the base given, as a signed 64-bit number unless
unsigned interpretation of the input number had been forced (with an u
prefix).
Numeric operations support a saturated mode via the question
mark ‘? ’ modifier suffix; the
keyword ‘saturated ’ is optional,
‘+? ’,
‘+?satu ’, and
‘+?saturated ’ are therefore
identical. In saturated mode overflow errors and division and modulo by
zero are no longer reported via the exit status, but the result will
linger at the minimum or maximum possible value, instead of overflowing
(or trapping). This is true also for the argument parse step. For the
bitwise shifts, the saturated maximum is 63. Any caught overflow will be
reported via the error number ! as
^ERR-OVERFLOW.
? vput vexpr res -? +1 -9223372036854775808
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res
0/75/OVERFLOW:-9223372036854775808
Character set agnostic string functions have no notion of
locale settings and character sets.
date-utc
- Outputs the current date and time in UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
with values named such that ‘
vput vexpr x
date-utc; eval wysh set $x ’ creates accessible
variables.
date-stamp-utc
- Outputs a RFC 3339 internet date/time format of UTC.
epoch
- The seconds and nanoseconds since the Unix epoch (1970-01-01T00:00:00)
named ‘
epoch_sec ’ and
‘epoch_nsec ’ such that
‘vput vexpr x epoch; eval wysh set
$x ’ creates accessible variables.
file-expand
- Performs the usual
Filename
transformations on its argument.
file-stat ,
file-lstat
- Perform the usual
Filename
transformations on the argument, then call
stat(2)
and
lstat(2),
respectively, and output values such that
‘
vput vexpr x file-stat FILE; eval wysh set
$x ’ creates accessible variables. The variable
‘st_type ’ uses solidus
‘/ ’ to denote directories,
commercial at ‘@ ’ for links,
number sign ‘# ’ for block
devices, percent sign ‘% ’ for
for character devices, vertical bar
‘| ’ for FIFOs, equal sign
‘= ’ for sockets, and the period
‘. ’ for the rest.
random
- Generates a random string of the given length, or of
PATH_MAX bytes (a constant from
/usr/include) if the value 0 is given; the
random string will be base64url encoded according to RFC 4648, and
thus be usable as a (portable) filename.
String operations work, sufficient support provided, according
to the active user's locale encoding and character set (see
Character sets). Where the
question mark ‘? ’ modifier suffix
is supported, a case-insensitive operation mode is available; the
keyword ‘case ’ is optional,
‘regex? ’ and
‘regex?case ’ are therefore
identical.
makeprint
- (One-way) Converts the argument to something safely printable on the
terminal.
regex
- [Option] A string operation that will try to match the first argument
with the regular expression given as the second argument.
‘
? ’ modifier suffix is
supported. If the optional third argument has been given then instead
of showing the match offset a replacement operation is performed: the
third argument is treated as if specified within dollar-single-quote
(see Shell-style
argument quoting), and any occurrence of a positional parameter,
for example 0, 1 etc. is
replaced with the according match group of the regular expression:
? vput vexpr res regex bananarama \
(.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}au\$2'
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
1/61/NODATA::
? vput vexpr res regex?case bananarama \
(.*)NanA(.*) '\${1}uauf\$2'
? echo $?/$!/$^ERRNAME:$res:
0/0/NONE:bauauframa:
vpospar
- [Only new quoting rules] Manage the positional parameter stack (see
1, #, *,
@ as well as
shift ). If the
first argument is ‘clear ’, then the
positional parameter stack of the current context, or the global one, if
there is none, is cleared. If it is
‘set ’, then the remaining arguments
will be used to (re)create the stack, if the parameter stack size limit is
excessed an ^ERR-OVERFLOW error will occur.
If the first argument is
‘quote ’, a round-trip capable
representation of the stack contents is created, with each quoted
parameter separated from each other with the first character of
ifs, and followed by the first character of
if-ws, if that is not empty and not identical to
the first. If that results in no separation at all a
space character is used. This mode supports
vput (see
Command modifiers). I.e.,
the subcommands ‘set ’ and
‘quote ’ can be used (in
conjunction with eval ) to (re)create an argument
stack from and to a single variable losslessly.
? vpospar set hey, "'you ", world!
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
? vput vpospar x quote
? vpospar clear
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
? eval vpospar set ${x}
? echo $#: <${1}><${2}><${3}>
visual
- (v) Takes a message list and invokes the
VISUAL
display editor on each message. Modified contents are discarded unless the
writebackedited variable is set, and are not used
unless the mailbox can be written to and the editor returns a successful
exit status. edit can be used instead for a less
display oriented editor.
write
- (w) For conventional messages the body without all headers is written. The
original message is never marked for deletion in the originating mail
folder. The output is decrypted and converted to its native format as
necessary. If the output file exists, the text is appended. If a message
is in MIME multipart format its first part is written to the specified
file as for conventional messages, handling of the remains depends on the
execution mode. No special handling of compressed files is performed.
In interactive mode the user is consecutively asked for the
filenames of the processed parts. For convenience saving of each part
may be skipped by giving an empty value, the same result as writing it
to /dev/null. Shell piping the part content by
specifying a leading vertical bar
‘| ’ character for the filename is
supported. Other user input undergoes the usual
Filename
transformations, including shell pathname wildcard pattern
expansions
(glob(7))
and shell variable expansion for the message as such, not the individual
parts, and contents of the destination file are overwritten if the file
previously existed. Character set conversion to
ttycharset is performed when saving text data.
[v15 behaviour may differ] In non-interactive mode any part
which does not specify a filename is ignored, and suspicious parts of
filenames of the remaining parts are URL percent encoded (as via
urlcodec ) to prevent injection of malicious
character sequences, resulting in a filename that will be written into
the current directory. Existing files will not be overwritten, instead
the part number or a dot are appended after a number sign
‘# ’ to the name until file
creation succeeds (or fails due to other reasons).
xcall
- [Only new quoting rules] The sole difference to
call is that the new macro is executed in place of
the current one, which will not regain control: all resources of the
current macro will be released first. This implies that any setting
covered by localopts will be forgotten and covered
variables will become cleaned up. If this command is not used from within
a call ed macro it will silently be (a more
expensive variant of) call .
xit
- (x) A synonym for
exit .
z
- [Only new quoting rules] S-nail presents message headers in
screenfuls as described under the
headers command. Without arguments this command
scrolls to the next window of messages, likewise if the argument is
‘+ ’. An argument of
‘- ’ scrolls to the last,
‘^ ’ scrolls to the first, and
‘$ ’ to the last
screen of messages. A number argument prefixed by
‘+ ’ or
‘- ’ indicates that the window is
calculated in relation to the current position, and a number without a
prefix specifies an absolute position.
Z
- [Only new quoting rules] Similar to
z , but scrolls
to the next or previous window that contains at least one
‘new ’ or
flag ged message.
Command escapes are available in Compose
mode during interactive usage, when explicitly requested via
-~ , and in batch mode (-# ).
They perform special functions, like editing headers of the message being
composed, calling normal COMMANDS, yielding
a shell, etc. Command escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines,
and consist of an escape followed by a command character. The default
escape character is the tilde
‘~ ’.
Unless otherwise documented command escapes ensure proper updates
of the error number ! and the exit status
?. The variable errexit controls
whether a failed operation errors out message compose mode and causes
program exit. Escapes may be prefixed by none to multiple single character
command modifiers, interspersed whitespace is ignored:
- An effect equivalent to the command modifier
ignerr can be achieved with hyphen-minus
‘- ’, overriding
errexit.
- The modifier dollar ‘
$ ’
eval uates the remains of the line; also see
Shell-style argument
quoting. [v15 behaviour may differ] For now the entire input line is
evaluated as a whole; to avoid that control operators like semicolon
; are interpreted unintentionally, they must be
quoted.
Addition of the command line to the [Option]al history can be
prevented by placing whitespace directly after escape.
The [Option]al key bind ings support a compose mode
specific context. The following command escapes are supported:
~~
string
- Insert the string of text in the message prefaced by a single
‘
~ ’. (If the escape character has
been changed, that character must be doubled instead.)
~!
command
- Execute the indicated shell command which follows,
replacing unescaped exclamation marks with the previously executed command
if the internal variable bang is set, then return to
the message.
~.
- End compose mode and send the message. The hooks
on-compose-splice-shell and
on-compose-splice, in order, will be called when
set, after which, in interactive mode askatend
(leading to askcc, askbcc) and
askattach will be checked as well as
asksend, after which a set
on-compose-leave hook will be called,
autocc and autobcc will be
joined in if set, finally a given
message-inject-tail will be incorporated, after
which the compose mode is left.
~:
S-nail-command or ~_
S-nail-command
- Can be used to execute COMMANDS (which
are allowed in compose mode).
~<
filename
- Identical to
~r .
~<!
command
- command is executed using the shell. Its standard
output is inserted into the message.
~?
- [Option] Write a summary of command escapes.
~@
[filename...]
- Append or edit the list of attachments. Does not manage the error number
! and the exit status ?
(please use
~^ if error handling is necessary).
The append mode expects a list of filename arguments
as shell tokens (see
Shell-style argument
quoting; token-separating commas are ignored, too), to be interpreted
as documented for the command line option -a , with
the message number exception as below.
Without filename arguments the
attachment list is edited, entry by entry; if a filename is left empty,
that attachment is deleted from the list; once the end of the list is
reached either new attachments may be entered or the session can be quit
by committing an empty “new” attachment. In
non-interactive mode or in batch mode (-# ) the
list of attachments is effectively not edited but instead recreated;
again, an empty input ends list creation.
For all modes, if a given filename solely consists of the
number sign ‘# ’ followed by either
a valid message number of the currently active mailbox, or by a period
‘. ’, referring to the current
message of the active mailbox, the so-called “dot”, then
the given message is attached as a
‘message/rfc822 ’ MIME message
part. The number sign must be quoted to avoid misinterpretation as a
shell comment character.
~|
command
- Pipe the message text through the specified filter command. If the command
gives no output or terminates abnormally, retain the original text of the
message. The command
fmt(1)
is often used as a rejustifying filter.
If the first character of the command is a vertical bar, then
the entire message including header fields is subject to the filter
command, so ‘~|| echo Fcc: /tmp/test;
cat ’ will prepend a file-carbon-copy message header. Also
see ~e , ~v .
~^
cmd [subcmd
[arg3 [arg4]]]
- Inspect and modify the message using the semantics of
digmsg , therefore arguments are evaluated
according to
Shell-style argument
quoting. Error number ! and exit status
? are not managed: errors are handled via the
protocol, and hard errors like I/O failures cannot be handled.
The protocol consists of command lines followed by (a)
response line(s). The first field of the response line represents a
status code which specifies whether a command was successful or not,
whether result data is to be expected, and if, the format of the result
data. Response data will be shell quoted as necessary for consumption by
readsh , or eval and
vpospar , to name a few. Error status code lines
may optionally contain additional context:
- ‘
210 ’
- Status ok; the remains of the line are the result.
- ‘
211 ’
- Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.
What follows are lines of result addresses, terminated by an empty
line. All the input, including the empty line, must be consumed before
further commands can be issued. Address lines consist of two token,
first the plain network address, e.g.,
‘
bob@exam.ple ’, followed by the
(quoted) full address as known: ‘'(Lovely) Bob
<bob@exam.ple>' ’. Non-network addresses use the
first field to indicate the type (hyphen-minus
‘- ’ for files, vertical bar
‘| ’ for pipes, and number sign
‘# ’ for names which will undergo
alias processing) instead, the actual value
will be in the second field.
- ‘
212 ’
- Status ok; the rest of the line is optionally used for more status.
What follows are lines of furtherly unspecified (quoted) string
content, terminated by an empty line. All the input, including the
empty line, must be consumed before further commands can be
issued.
- ‘
500 ’
- Syntax error; invalid command.
- ‘
501 ’
- Syntax error or otherwise invalid parameters or arguments.
- ‘
505 ’
- Error: an argument fails verification. For example an invalid address
has been specified (also see expandaddr), or an
attempt was made to modify anything in S-nail's own namespace, or a
modifying subcommand has been used on a read-only message.
- ‘
506 ’
- Error: an otherwise valid argument is rendered invalid due to context.
For example, a second address is added to a header which may consist
of a single address only.
If a command indicates failure then the message will have
remained unmodified. Most commands can fail with
‘500 ’ if required arguments are
missing, or excessive arguments have been given (false command usage).
([v15 behaviour may differ] The latter does not yet occur regularly,
because as stated in
Shell-style argument
quoting our argument parser is not yet smart enough to work on
subcommand base; for example one might get excess argument error for a
three argument subcommand that receives four arguments, but not for a
four argument subcommand which receives six arguments: here excess will
be joined.) The following (case-insensitive) commands are supported:
attachment
- This command allows listing, removal and addition of message
attachments. The second argument specifies the subcommand to apply,
one of:
attribute
- This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove and prints any known attributes of
the first found attachment via
‘212 ’ upon success or
‘501 ’ if no such attachment
can be found. The attributes are written as lines with a keyword
and a value token.
attribute-at
- This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove-at and is otherwise identical to
attribute .
attribute-set
- This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove , and will set the attribute given
as the fourth to the value given as the fifth token argument. If
the value is an empty token, then the given attribute is removed,
or reset to a default value if existence of the attribute is
crucial.
It returns via
‘210 ’ upon success, with
the index of the found attachment following,
‘505 ’ for message
attachments or if the given keyword is invalid, and
‘501 ’ if no such
attachment can be found. The following keywords may be used
(case-insensitively):
- ‘
filename ’
- Sets the filename of the MIME part, i.e., the name that is
used for display and when (suggesting a name for) saving
(purposes).
- ‘
content-description ’
- Associate some descriptive information to the attachment's
content, used in favour of the plain filename by some
MUAs.
- ‘
content-id ’
- May be used for uniquely identifying MIME entities in several
contexts; this expects a special reference address format as
defined in RFC 2045 and generates a
‘
505 ’ upon address
content verification failure.
- ‘
content-type ’
- Defines the media type/subtype of the part, which is managed
automatically, but can be overwritten.
- ‘
content-disposition ’
- Automatically set to the string
‘
attachment ’.
attribute-set-at
- This uses the same search mechanism as described for
remove-at and is otherwise identical to
attribute-set .
insert
- Adds the attachment given as the third argument, specified exactly
as documented for the command line option
-a , and supporting the message number
extension as documented for ~@ . This
reports ‘210 ’ upon success,
with the index of the new attachment following,
‘505 ’ if the given file
cannot be opened, ‘506 ’ if
an on-the-fly performed character set conversion fails, otherwise
‘501 ’ is reported; this is
also reported if character set conversion is requested but not
available.
list
- List all attachments via
‘
212 ’, or report
‘501 ’ if no attachments
exist. This command is the default command of
attachment if no second argument has been
given.
remove
- This will remove the attachment given as the third argument, and
report ‘
210 ’ upon success or
‘501 ’ if no such attachment
can be found. If there exists any path component in the given
argument, then an exact match of the path which has been used to
create the attachment is used directly, but if only the basename
of that path matches then all attachments are traversed to find an
exact match first, and the removal occurs afterwards; if multiple
basenames match, a ‘506 ’
error occurs. Message attachments are treated as absolute
pathnames.
If no path component exists in the given argument,
then all attachments will be searched for
‘filename= ’ parameter
matches as well as for matches of the basename of the path which
has been used when the attachment has been created; multiple
matches result in a
‘506 ’.
remove-at
- This will interpret the third argument as a number and remove the
attachment at that list position (counting from one!), reporting
‘
210 ’ upon success or
‘505 ’ if the argument is not
a number or ‘501 ’ if no such
attachment exists.
- This command allows listing, inspection, and editing of message
headers. Header name case is not normalized, so that case-insensitive
comparison should be used when matching names. The second argument
specifies the subcommand to apply, one of:
insert
- Create a new or an additional instance of the header given in the
third argument, with the header body content as given in the
fourth token. It may return
‘
501 ’ if the third argument
specifies a free-form header field name that is invalid, or if
body content extraction fails to succeed,
‘505 ’ if any extracted
address does not pass syntax and/or security checks or on S-nail
namespace violations, and
‘506 ’ to indicate prevention
of excessing a single-instance header — note that
‘Subject: ’ can be appended
to (a space separator will be added automatically first).
‘To: ’,
‘Cc: ’ and
‘Bcc: ’ support the
‘?single ’ modifier to
enforce treatment as a single addressee, for example
‘header insert To?single: 'exa,
<m@ple>' ’; the word
‘single ’ is optional.
‘210 ’ is
returned upon success, followed by the name of the header and
the list position of the newly inserted instance. The list
position is always 1 for single-instance header fields. All
free-form header fields are managed in a single list; also see
customhdr.
list
- Without a third argument a list of all yet existing headers is
given via ‘
210 ’; this
command is the default command of header
if no second argument has been given. A third argument restricts
output to the given header only, which may fail with
‘501 ’ if no such field is
defined.
remove
- This will remove all instances of the header given as the third
argument, reporting ‘
210 ’
upon success, ‘501 ’ if no
such header can be found, and
‘505 ’ on S-nail namespace
violations.
remove-at
- This will remove from the header given as the third argument the
instance at the list position (counting from one!) given with the
fourth argument, reporting
‘
210 ’ upon success or
‘505 ’ if the list position
argument is not a number or on S-nail namespace violations, and
‘501 ’ if no such header
instance exists.
show
- Shows the content of the header given as the third argument.
Dependent on the header type this may respond with
‘
211 ’ or
‘212 ’; any failure results
in ‘501 ’.
In compose-mode read-only access to optional pseudo
headers in the S-nail private namespace is available:
- ‘
Mailx-Command: ’
- The name of the command that generates the message, one of
‘
forward ’,
‘Lreply ’,
‘mail ’,
‘Reply ’,
‘reply ’,
‘resend ’. This pseudo header
always exists (in compose-mode).
- ‘
Mailx-Raw-To: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Raw-Cc: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Raw-Bcc: ’
- Represent the frozen initial state of these headers before any
transformation (
alias ,
alternates ,
recipients-in-cc etc.) took place.
- ‘
Mailx-Orig-Sender: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Orig-From: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Orig-To: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Orig-Cc: ’
-
- ‘
Mailx-Orig-Bcc: ’
- The values of said headers of the original message which has been
addressed by any of
reply ,
forward , resend .
The sender field is special as it is filled in with the sole
sender according to RFC 5322 rules, it may thus be equal to the
from field.
help ,
?
- Show an abstract of the above commands via
‘
211 ’.
version
- This command will print the protocol version via
‘
210 ’.
~A
- The same as ‘
~i
Sign ’.
~a
- The same as ‘
~i
sign ’.
~b
name ...
- Add the given names to the list of blind carbon copy recipients.
~c
name ...
- Add the given names to the list of carbon copy recipients.
~d
- Read the file specified by the
DEAD variable into
the message.
~e
- Invoke the text
EDITOR on the message collected so
far, then return to compose mode. ~v can be used
for a more display oriented editor, and ~| | offers
a pipe-based editing approach.
~F
messages
- Read the named messages into the message being sent, including all message
headers and MIME parts, and honouring forward-add-cc
as well as forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. If no messages are specified,
read in the current message, the “dot”.
~f
messages
- Read the named messages into the message being sent. If no messages are
specified, read in the current message, the “dot”. Strips
down the list of header fields according to the
‘
forward ’ (with
posix: ‘type ’)
white- and blacklist selection of headerpick , and
honours forward-add-cc as well as
forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. For MIME multipart messages,
only the first displayable part is included.
~H
- In interactive mode, edit the message header fields
‘
From: ’,
‘Reply-To: ’ and
‘Sender: ’ by typing each one in turn
and allowing the user to edit the field. The default values for these
fields originate from the from,
reply-to and sender variables.
In non-interactive mode this sets ^ERR-NOTTY.
~h
- In interactive mode, edit the message header fields
‘
To: ’,
‘Cc: ’,
‘Bcc: ’ and
‘Subject: ’ by typing each one in
turn and allowing the user to edit the field. In non-interactive mode this
sets ^ERR-NOTTY.
~I
variable
- Insert the value of the specified variable into the message. The message
remains unaltered if the variable is unset or empty. Any embedded
character sequences ‘
\t ’ horizontal
tabulator and ‘\n ’ line feed are
expanded in posix mode; otherwise the expansion
should occur at set time ([v15 behaviour may
differ] by using the command modifier wysh).
~i
variable
- Like
~I , but appends a newline character.
~M
messages
- Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by
indentprefix. If no messages are specified, read the
current message, the “dot”. Honours
forward-add-cc as well as
forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail.
~m
messages
- Read the named messages into the message being sent, indented by
indentprefix. If no messages are specified, read the
current message, the “dot”. Strips down the list of header
fields according to the ‘
type ’
white- and blacklist selection of headerpick .
Honours forward-add-cc as well as
forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail. For MIME multipart messages,
only the first displayable part is included.
~p
- Display the message collected so far, prefaced by the message header
fields and followed by the attachment list, if any.
~Q
- Read in the given / current message(s) using the algorithm of
quote (except that is implicitly assumed, even if
not set), honouring quote-add-cc.
~q
- Abort the message being sent, copying it to the file specified by the
DEAD variable if save is
set.
~R
filename
- Identical to
~r , but indent each line that has
been read by indentprefix.
~r
filename [HERE-delimiter]
- Read the named file, object to
Filename
transformations excluding shell globs and variable expansions, into
the message; if filename is the hyphen-minus
‘
- ’ then standard input is used (for
pasting, for example). Only in this latter mode
HERE-delimiter may be given: if it is data will be
read in until the given HERE-delimiter is seen on a
line by itself, and encountering EOF is an error; the
HERE-delimiter is a required argument in
non-interactive mode; if it is single-quote quoted then the pasted content
will not be expanded, [v15 behaviour may differ] otherwise a future
version of S-nail may perform shell-style expansion on the content.
~s
string
- Cause the named string to become the current subject field. Newline (NL)
and carriage-return (CR) bytes are invalid and will be normalized to space
(SP) characters.
~t
name ...
- Add the given name(s) to the direct recipient list.
~U
messages
- Read in the given / current message(s) excluding all headers, indented by
indentprefix. Honours
forward-add-cc as well as
forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail.
~u
messages
- Read in the given / current message(s), excluding all headers. Honours
forward-add-cc as well as
forward-inject-head and
forward-inject-tail.
~v
- Invoke the
VISUAL editor on the message collected
so far, then return to compose mode. ~e can be
used for a less display oriented editor, and ~| |
offers a pipe-based editing approach.
~w
filename
- Write the message onto the named file, which is object to the usual
Filename
transformations. If the file exists, the message is appended to
it.
~x
- Same as
~q , except that the message is not saved
at all.
Internal S-nail variables are controlled via the set and
unset commands; prefixing a variable name with the
string ‘no ’ and calling
set has the same effect as using
unset : ‘unset
crt ’ and ‘set nocrt ’ do
the same thing. varshow will give more insight on the
given variable(s), and set , when called without
arguments, will show a listing of all variables. Both commands support a more
verbose listing mode. Some well-known variables will
also become inherited from the program
ENVIRONMENT implicitly, others can be
imported explicitly with the command environ and
henceforth share said properties.
Two different kinds of internal variables exist, and both of which
can also form chains. There are boolean variables, which can only be in one
of the two states “set” and “unset”, and value
variables with a(n optional) string value. For the latter proper quoting is
necessary upon assignment time, the introduction of the section
COMMANDS documents the supported quoting
rules.
? wysh set one=val\ 1 two="val 2" \
three='val "3"' four=$'val \'4\''; \
varshow one two three four; \
unset one two three four
Dependent upon the actual option string values may become
interpreted as colour names, command specifications, normal text, etc. They
may be treated as numbers, in which case decimal values are expected if so
documented, but otherwise any numeric format and base that is valid and
understood by the vexpr command may be used,
too.
There also exists a special kind of string value, the
“boolean string”, which must either be a decimal integer (in
which case ‘0 ’ is false and
‘1 ’ and any other value is true) or
any of the (case-insensitive) strings
‘off ’,
‘no ’,
‘n ’ and
‘false ’ for a false boolean and
‘on ’,
‘yes ’,
‘y ’ and
‘true ’ for a true boolean; a special
kind of boolean string is the “quadoption”: it can optionally
be prefixed with the (case-insensitive) term
‘ask- ’, as in
‘ask-yes ’; in interactive mode the
user will be prompted, otherwise the actual boolean is used.
Variable chains extend a plain
‘variable ’ with
‘variable-HOST ’ and
‘variable-USER@HOST ’ variants. Here
‘HOST ’ will be converted to all
lowercase when looked up (but not when the variable is set or unset!),
[Option]ally IDNA converted, and indeed means
‘server:port ’ if a
‘port ’ had been specified in the
contextual Uniform Resource Locator URL, see
On URL syntax and
credential lookup. Even though this mechanism is based on URLs no URL
percent encoding may be applied to neither of
‘USER ’ nor
‘HOST ’, variable chains need to be
specified using raw data; the mentioned section contains examples. Variables
which support chains are explicitly documented as such, and S-nail treats
the base name of any such variable special, meaning that users should not
create custom names like
‘variable-xyz ’ in order to avoid false
classifications and treatment of such variables.
The standard POSIX 2008/Cor 2-2016 mandates the following initial variable
settings: noallnet, noappend,
asksub, noaskbcc,
noautoprint, nobang,
nocmd, nocrt,
nodebug, nodot,
escape set to ‘~ ’,
noflipr, nofolder,
header, nohold,
noignore, noignoreeof,
nokeep, nokeepsave,
nometoo, nooutfolder,
nopage, prompt set to
‘? ’,
noquiet, norecord,
save, nosendwait,
noshowto, noSign,
nosign, toplines set to
‘5 ’.
However, S-nail has built-in some initial (and some default)
settings which (may) diverge, others may become adjusted by one of the
Resource files. Displaying the
former is accomplished via set :
‘$ s-nail -:/ -v -Xset -Xx ’. In
general this implementation sets (and has extended the meaning of)
sendwait, and does not support the
noonehop variable – use command line options or
mta-arguments to pass options through to a
mta. The default global resource file sets, among
others, the variables hold, keep
and keepsave, establishes a default
headerpick selection etc., and should thus be taken
into account.
- ?
- (Read-only) The exit status of the last command, or the
return value of the macro
call ed last. This status has a meaning in the
state machine: in conjunction with errexit any non-0
exit status will cause a program exit, and in posix
mode any error while loading (any of the) resource files will have the
same effect. ignerr , one of the
Command modifiers, can be used
to instruct the state machine to ignore errors.
- !
- (Read-only) The current error number
(errno(3)),
which is set after an error occurred; it is also available via
^ERR, and the error name and documentation string
can be queried via ^ERRNAME and
^ERRDOC. [v15 behaviour may differ] This machinery
is new and the error number is only really usable if a command explicitly
states that it manages the variable !, for others
errno will be used in case of errors, or ^ERR-INVAL
if that is 0: it thus may or may not reflect the real error. The error
number may be set with the command
return .
- ^
- (Read-only) This is a multiplexer variable which performs dynamic
expansion of the requested state or condition, of which there are:
- ^ERR, ^ERRDOC,
^ERRNAME
- The number, documentation, and name of the current
errno(3),
respectively, which is usually set after an error occurred. The
documentation is an [Option], the name is used if not available. [v15
behaviour may differ] This machinery is new and is usually reliable
only if a command explicitly states that it manages the variable
!, which is effectively identical to
^ERR. Each of those variables can be suffixed
with a hyphen minus followed by a name or number, in which case the
expansion refers to the given error. Note this is a direct mapping of
(a subset of) the system error values:
define work {
eval echo \$1: \$^ERR-$1:\
\$^ERRNAME-$1: \$^ERRDOC-$1
vput vexpr i + "$1" 1
if [ $i -lt 16 ]
\xcall work $i
end
}
call work 0
- ^ERRQUEUE-COUNT,
^ERRQUEUE-EXISTS
- The number of messages in the [Option]al queue of
errors , and a string indicating queue state:
empty or (translated) “ERROR”. Always 0 and the empty
string, respectively, unless features includes
‘,+errors, ’.
- *
- (Read-only) Expands all positional parameters (see
1), separated by the first character of the value of
ifs. [v15 behaviour may differ] The special
semantics of the equally named special parameter of the
sh(1) are
not yet supported.
- @
- (Read-only) Expands all positional parameters (see
1), separated by a space character. If placed in
double quotation marks, each positional parameter is properly quoted to
expand to a single parameter again.
- #
- (Read-only) Expands to the number of positional parameters, i.e., the size
of the positional parameter stack in decimal.
- 0
- (Read-only) Inside the scope of a
define d and
call ed macro this expands to the name of the
calling macro, or to the empty string if the macro is running from
top-level. For the [Option]al regular expression search and replace
operator of vexpr this expands to the entire
matching expression. It represents the program name in global
context.
- 1
- (Read-only) Access of the positional parameter stack. All further
parameters can be accessed with this syntax, too,
‘
2 ’,
‘3 ’ etc.; positional parameters can
be shifted off the stack by calling shift . The
parameter stack contains, for example, the arguments of a
call ed define d macro, the
matching groups of the [Option]al regular expression search and replace
expression of vexpr , and can be explicitly created
or overwritten with the command vpospar .
- account
- (Read-only) Is set to the active
account .
- add-file-recipients
- (Boolean) When file or pipe recipients have been specified, mention them
in the corresponding address fields of the message instead of silently
stripping them from their recipient list. By default such addressees are
not mentioned.
- allnet
- (Boolean) Causes only the local part to be evaluated when comparing
addresses.
- append
- (Boolean) Causes messages saved in the
secondary mailbox
MBOX to be appended to the end rather than
prepended. This should always be set.
- askatend
- (Boolean) Causes the prompts for
‘
Cc: ’ and
‘Bcc: ’ lists to appear after the
message has been edited.
- askattach
- (Boolean) If set, S-nail asks an interactive user for files to attach at
the end of each message; An empty line finalizes the list.
- askcc
- (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for carbon copy
recipients (at the end of each message if askatend
or bsdcompat are set).
- askbcc
- (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for blind carbon copy
recipients (at the end of each message if askatend
or bsdcompat are set).
- asksend
- (Boolean) Causes the interactive user to be prompted for confirmation to
send the message or reenter compose mode after having been shown a
preliminary envelope summary.
- asksign
- (Boolean)[Option] Causes the interactive user to be prompted if the
message is to be signed at the end of each message. The
smime-sign variable is ignored when this variable is
set.
- asksub
- (Boolean) Causes S-nail to prompt the interactive user for the subject
upon entering compose mode unless a subject already exists.
- attrlist
- A sequence of characters to display in the
‘
attribute ’ column of the
headline as shown in the display of
headers ; each for one type of messages (see
Message states), with the default
being ‘NUROSPMFAT+-$~ ’ or
‘NU *HMFAT+-$~ ’ if
the bsdflags variable is set, in the following
order:
- ‘
N ’
- new.
- ‘
U ’
- unread but old.
- ‘
R ’
- new but read.
- ‘
O ’
- read and old.
- ‘
S ’
- saved.
- ‘
P ’
- preserved.
- ‘
M ’
- mboxed.
- ‘
F ’
- flagged.
- ‘
A ’
- answered.
- ‘
T ’
- draft.
- ‘
+ ’
- [v15 behaviour may differ] start of a (collapsed) thread in threaded
mode (see autosort,
thread );
- ‘
- ’
- [v15 behaviour may differ] an uncollapsed thread in threaded mode;
only used in conjunction with
-L .
- ‘
$ ’
- classified as spam.
- ‘
~ ’
- classified as possible spam.
- autobcc
- Specifies a list of recipients to which a blind carbon copy of each
outgoing message will be sent automatically.
- autocc
- Specifies a list of recipients to which a carbon copy of each outgoing
message will be sent automatically.
- autocollapse
- (Boolean) Causes threads to be collapsed automatically when .Ql thread Ns
ed
sort mode is entered (see the
collapse command).
- autoprint
- (Boolean) Enable automatic
type ing of a(n
existing) “successive” message after
delete and undelete
commands: the message that becomes the new “dot” is shown
automatically, as via dp or
dt .
- autosort
- Causes sorted mode (see the
sort command) to be
entered automatically with the value of this variable as sorting method
when a folder is opened, for example ‘set
autosort=thread ’.
- bang
- (Boolean) Enables the substitution of all not (reverse-solidus) escaped
exclamation mark ‘
! ’ characters by
the contents of the last executed command for the
! shell escape command and
~! , one of the compose mode
COMMAND ESCAPES. If this
variable is not set no reverse solidus stripping is performed.
- bind-timeout
- [Obsolete] Predecessor of bind-inter-byte-timeout.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Setting this automatically sets the
successor.
- bind-inter-byte-timeout
- [Option] Terminals may generate multi-byte sequences for special function
keys, for example, but these sequences may not become read as a unit. And
multi-byte sequences can be defined freely via
bind . This variable specifies the timeout in
milliseconds that the MLE (see
On terminal
control and line editor) waits for more bytes to arrive unless it
considers a sequence “complete”. The default is 200, the
maximum is about 10 seconds. In the following example the comments state
which sequences are affected by this timeout:
? bind base abc echo 0 # abc
? bind base ab,c echo 1 # ab
? bind base abc,d echo 2 # abc
? bind base ac,d echo 3 # ac
? bind base a,b,c echo 4
? bind base a,b,c,d echo 5
? bind base a,b,cc,dd echo 6 # cc and dd
- bind-inter-key-timeout
- [Option] Multi-key
bind sequences do not time out
by default. If this variable is set, then the current key sequence is
forcefully terminated once the timeout (in milliseconds) triggers. The
value should be (maybe significantly) larger than
bind-inter-byte-timeout, but may not excess the
maximum, too.
- bsdcompat
- (Boolean) Sets some cosmetical features to traditional BSD style; has the
same affect as setting askatend and all other
variables prefixed with ‘
bsd ’; it
also changes the behaviour of emptystart (which does
not exist in BSD).
- bsdflags
- (Boolean) Changes the letters shown in the first column of a header
summary to traditional BSD style.
- bsdheadline
- (Boolean) Changes the display of columns in a header summary to
traditional BSD style.
- bsdmsgs
- (Boolean) Changes some informational messages to traditional BSD
style.
- bsdorder
- (Boolean) Causes the ‘
Subject: ’
field to appear immediately after the
‘To: ’ field in message headers and
with the ~h
COMMAND ESCAPES.
- build-cc, build-ld,
build-os, build-rest
- (Read-only) The build environment, including the compiler, the linker, the
operating system S-nail has been build for, usually taken from
uname(1)
via ‘
uname -s ’, and then lowercased,
as well as all the possibly interesting rest of the configuration and
build environment. This information is also available in the
verbose output of the command
version .
- charset-7bit
- The value that should appear in the
‘
charset= ’ parameter of
‘Content-Type: ’ MIME header fields
when no character set conversion of the message data was performed. This
defaults to US-ASCII, and the chosen character set should be US-ASCII
compatible.
- charset-8bit
- [Option] The default 8-bit character set that is used as an implicit last
member of the variable sendcharsets. This defaults
to UTF-8 if character set conversion capabilities are available, and to
ISO-8859-1 otherwise (unless the operating system environment is known to
always and exclusively support UTF-8 locales), in which case the only
supported character set is ttycharset and this
variable is effectively ignored.
- charset-unknown-8bit
- [Option] RFC 1428 specifies conditions when internet mail gateways shall
“upgrade” the content of a mail message by using a character
set with the name ‘
unknown-8bit ’.
Because of the unclassified nature of this character set S-nail will not
be capable to convert this character set to any other character set. If
this variable is set any message part which uses the character set
‘unknown-8bit ’ is assumed to really
be in the character set given in the value, otherwise the (final) value of
charset-8bit is used for this purpose.
This variable will also be taken into account if a MIME type
(see The mime.types
files) of a MIME message part that uses the
‘binary ’ character set is
forcefully treated as text.
- cmd
- The default value for the
pipe command.
- colour-disable
- (Boolean)[Option] Forcefully disable usage of colours. Also see the
section Coloured display.
- colour-pager
- (Boolean)[Option] Whether colour shall be used for output that is paged
through
PAGER . Note that pagers may need special
command line options, for example
less(1)
requires the option -R and
lv(1) the
option -c in order to support colours. Often doing
manual adjustments is unnecessary since S-nail may perform adjustments
dependent on the value of the environment variable
PAGER (see there for more).
- contact-mail, contact-web
- (Read-only) Addresses for contact per email and web, respectively, for bug
reports, suggestions, or anything else regarding S-nail. The former can be
used directly: ‘
? eval
mail $contact-mail ’.
- content-description-forwarded-message,
content-description-quote-attachment,
content-description-smime-message,
content-description-smime-signature
- [Option](partially) Strings which will be placed in according
‘
Content-Description: ’ headers if
non-empty. They all have default values, for example
‘Forwarded message ’.
- crt
- In a(n interactive) terminal session, then if this valued variable is set
it will be used as a threshold to determine how many lines the given
output has to span before it will be displayed via the configured
PAGER ; Usage of the PAGER
can be forced by setting this to the value
‘0 ’, setting it without a value will
deduce the current height of the terminal screen to compute the threshold
(see LINES , screen and
stty(1)).
[v15 behaviour may differ] At the moment this uses the count of lines of
the message in wire format, which, dependent on the
mime-encoding of the message, is unrelated to the
number of display lines. (The software is old and historically the
relation was a given thing.)
- customhdr
- Define a set of custom headers to be injected into newly composed or
forwarded messages. A custom header consists of the field name followed by
a colon ‘
: ’ and the field content
body. Standard header field names cannot be overwritten by a custom
header, with the exception of
‘Comments: ’ and
‘Keywords: ’. Different to the
command line option -C the variable value is
interpreted as a comma-separated list of custom headers: to include commas
in header bodies they need to become escaped with reverse solidus
‘\ ’. Headers can be managed more
freely in Compose mode via
~^ .
? set customhdr='Hdr1: Body1-1\,
Body1-2, Hdr2: Body2'
- datefield
- Controls the appearance of the ‘
%d ’
date and time format specification of the headline
variable, that is used, for example, when viewing the summary of
headers . If unset, then the local receiving date
is used and displayed unformatted, otherwise the message sending
‘Date: ’. It is possible to assign a
strftime(3)
format string and control formatting, but embedding newlines via the
‘%n ’ format is not supported, and
will result in display errors. The default is
‘%Y-%m-%d %H:%M ’, and also see
datefield-markout-older.
- datefield-markout-older
- Only used in conjunction with datefield. Can be used
to create a visible distinction of messages dated more than a day in the
future, or older than six months, a concept comparable to the
-l option of the POSIX utility
ls(1). If
set to the empty string, then the plain month, day and year of the
‘Date: ’ will be displayed, but a
strftime(3)
format string to control formatting can be assigned. The default is
‘%Y-%m-%d ’.
- debug
- (Boolean) (Almost) Enter a debug-only sandbox mode which generates many
log messages, disables the actual delivery of messages, and also implies
norecord as well as nosave.
Also see verbose.
- disposition-notification-send
- (Boolean)[Option] Emit a
‘
Disposition-Notification-To: ’
header (RFC 3798) with the message. This requires the
from variable to be set.
- dot
- (Boolean) When dot is set, a period
‘
. ’ on a line by itself during
message input in (interactive or batch -# )
Compose mode will be treated as
end-of-message (in addition to the normal end-of-file condition). This
behaviour is implied in posix mode with a set
ignoreeof.
- dotlock-disable
- (Boolean)[Option] Disable creation of
dotlock files for MBOX
databases.
- dotlock-ignore-error
- [Obsolete](Boolean)[Option] Ignore failures when creating
dotlock files. Please use
dotlock-disable instead.
- editalong
- If this variable is set then the editor is started automatically when a
message is composed in interactive mode. If the value starts with the
letter ‘
v ’ then this acts as if
~v , otherwise as if ~e
(see COMMAND ESCAPES) had
been specified. The editheaders variable is implied
for this automatically spawned editor session.
- editheaders
- (Boolean) When a message is edited while being composed, its header is
included in the editable text.
- emptystart
- (Boolean) When entering interactive mode S-nail normally writes “No
mail for user” and exits immediately if a mailbox is empty or does
not exist. If this variable is set S-nail starts even with an empty or
non-existent mailbox (the latter behaviour furtherly depends upon
bsdcompat, though).
- errexit
- (Boolean) Let each command with a non-0 exit status, including every
call ed macro which return s
a non-0 status, cause a program exit unless prefixed by
ignerr (see
Command modifiers). This also
affects COMMAND ESCAPES, but
which use a different modifier for ignoring the error. Please refer to the
variable ? for more on this topic.
- errors-limit
- [Option] Maximum number of entries in the
errors
queue.
- escape
- The first character of this value defines the escape character for
COMMAND ESCAPES in
Compose mode. The default value is
the character tilde ‘
~ ’. If set to
the empty string, command escapes are disabled.
- expandaddr
- If unset only user name and email address recipients are allowed
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode. If set without value all possible
recipient types will be accepted. A value is parsed as a comma-separated
list of case-insensitive strings, and if that contains
‘
restrict ’ behaviour equals the
former except when in interactive mode or if
COMMAND ESCAPES were enabled via
-~ or -# , in which case it
equals the latter, allowing all address types.
‘restrict ’ really acts like
‘restrict,-all,+name,+addr ’, so care
for ordering issues must be taken.
Recipient types can be added and removed with a plus sign
‘+ ’ or hyphen-minus
‘- ’ prefix, respectively. By
default invalid or disallowed types are filtered out and cause a
warning, hard send errors need to be enforced by including
‘fail ’. The value
‘all ’ covers all types,
‘fcc ’ whitelists
‘Fcc: ’ header targets regardless
of other settings, ‘file ’ file
targets (it includes ‘fcc ’),
‘pipe ’ command pipeline targets,
‘name ’ user names still unexpanded
after alias and
mta-aliases processing and thus left for expansion
by the mta (invalid for the built-in SMTP one),
and ‘addr ’ network addresses.
Targets are interpreted in the given order, so that
‘restrict,fail,+file,-all,+addr ’
will cause hard errors for any non-network address recipient address
unless running interactively or having been started with the option
-~ or -# ; in the latter
case(s) any type may be used.
User name receivers addressing valid local users can be
expanded to fully qualified network addresses (also see
hostname) by including
‘nametoaddr ’ in the list.
Historically invalid recipients were stripped off without causing
errors, this can be changed by making
‘failinvaddr ’ an entry of the list
(it really acts like
‘failinvaddr,+addr ’). Likewise,
‘domaincheck ’
(really ‘domaincheck,+addr ’)
compares address domain names against a whitelist and strips off
(‘fail ’ for hard errors)
addressees which fail this test; the domain name
‘localhost ’ and the non-empty
value of hostname (the real hostname otherwise)
are always whitelisted, expandaddr-domaincheck can
be set to extend this list. Finally some address providers (for example
-b , -c and all other
command line recipients) will be evaluated as if specified within
dollar-single-quotes (see
Shell-style argument
quoting) if the value list contains the string
‘shquote ’.
- expandaddr-domaincheck
- Can be set to a comma-separated list of domain names which should be
whitelisted for the evaluation of the
‘
domaincheck ’ mode of
expandaddr. IDNA encoding is not automatically
performed, addrcodec can be used to prepare the
domain (of an address).
- expandargv
- Unless this variable is set additional mta
(Mail-Transfer-Agent) arguments from the command line, as can be given
after a
-- separator, results in a program
termination with failure status. The same can be accomplished by using the
special (case-insensitive) value
‘fail ’. A lesser strict variant is
the otherwise identical ‘restrict ’,
which does accept such arguments in interactive mode, or if tilde commands
were enabled explicitly by using one of the command line options
-~ or -# . The empty value
will allow unconditional usage.
- features
- (Read-only) String giving a list of optional features. Features are
preceded with a plus sign ‘
+ ’ if
they are available, with a hyphen-minus
‘- ’ otherwise. To ease substring
matching the string starts and ends with a comma. The output of the
command version includes this information in a
more pleasant output.
- flipr
- (Boolean) This setting reverses the meanings of a set of reply commands,
turning the lowercase variants, which by default address all recipients
included in the header of a message (
reply ,
respond , followup ) into
the uppercase variants, which by default address the sender only
(Reply , Respond ,
Followup ) and vice versa.
- folder
- The default path under which mailboxes are to be saved: filenames that
begin with the plus sign ‘
+ ’ will
have the plus sign replaced with the value of this variable if set,
otherwise the plus sign will remain unchanged when doing
Filename
transformations; also see folder for more on
this topic, and know about standard imposed implications of
outfolder. The value supports a subset of
transformations itself, and if the non-empty value does not start with a
solidus ‘/ ’, then the value of
HOME will be prefixed automatically. Once the
actual value is evaluated first, the internal variable
folder-resolved will be updated for caching
purposes.
- folder-hook-FOLDER,
folder-hook
- Names a
define d macro which will be called
whenever a folder is opened. The macro will also
be invoked when new mail arrives, but message lists for commands executed
from the macro only include newly arrived messages then.
localopts are activated by default in a folder
hook, causing the covered settings to be reverted once the folder is left
again.
The specialized form will override the generic one if
‘FOLDER ’ matches the file that is
opened. Unlike other folder specifications, the fully expanded name of a
folder, without metacharacters, is used to avoid ambiguities. However,
if the mailbox resides under folder then the usual
‘+ ’ specification is tried in
addition, so that if folder is
“mail” (and thus relative to the user's home directory)
then /home/usr1/mail/sent will be tried as
‘folder-hook-/home/usr1/mail/sent ’
first, but then followed by
‘folder-hook-+sent ’.
- folder-resolved
- (Read-only) Set to the fully resolved path of folder
once that evaluation has occurred; rather internal.
- followup-to
- (Boolean) Controls whether a
‘
Mail-Followup-To: ’ header is
generated when sending messages to known mailing lists. The user as
determined via from (or, if that contains multiple
addresses, sender) will be placed in there if any
list addressee is not a subscribed list. Also see
followup-to-honour and the commands
mlist , mlsubscribe ,
reply and Lreply .
- followup-to-add-cc
- (Boolean) Controls whether the user will be added to the messages'
‘
Cc: ’ list in addition to placing an
entry in ‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ (see
followup-to).
- followup-to-honour
- Controls whether a
‘
Mail-Followup-To: ’ header is
honoured when group-replying to a message via
reply or Lreply . This is a
quadoption; if set without a value it
defaults to “yes”, and see
followup-to.
- forward-add-cc
- (Boolean) Whether senders of messages forwarded via
~F , ~f ,
~m , ~U or
~u shall be made members of the carbon copies
‘Cc: ’ list.
- forward-as-attachment
- (Boolean) Original messages are normally sent as inline text with the
forward command, and only the first part of a
multipart message is included. With this setting enabled messages are sent
as unmodified MIME ‘message/rfc822 ’
attachments with all of their parts included.
- forward-inject-head,
forward-inject-tail
- The strings to put before and after the text of a message with the
forward command, respectively. The former defaults
to ‘-------- Original Message
--------\n ’. Special format directives in these strings will
be expanded if possible, and if so configured the output will be folded
according to quote-fold; for more please refer to
quote-inject-head. Injections will not be performed
by forward if the variable
forward-as-attachment is set — the
COMMAND ESCAPES
~F , ~f ,
~M , ~m ,
~U , ~u always inject.
- from
- The address (or a list of addresses) to put into the
‘
From: ’ field of the message header,
quoting RFC 5322: the author(s) of the message, that is, the mailbox(es)
of the person(s) or system(s) responsible for the writing of the message.
According to that RFC setting the sender variable is
required if from contains more than one address.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Please expect automatic management of the
from and sender relationship.
Dependent on the context these addresses are handled as if they were in
the list of alternates .
If a file-based MTA is used, then from
(or, if that contains multiple addresses, sender)
can nonetheless be used as the envelope sender address at the MTA
protocol level (the RFC 5321 reverse-path), either via the
-r command line option (without argument; see
there for more), or by setting
r-option-implicit.
If the machine's hostname is not valid at the Internet (for
example at a dialup machine), then either this variable or
hostname ([v15-compat] a SMTP-based
mta adds even more fine-tuning capabilities with
smtp-hostname) have to be set: if so the message
and MIME part related unique ID fields
‘Message-ID: ’ and
‘Content-ID: ’ will be created
(except when disallowed by message-id-disable or
stealthmua).
- fullnames
- (Boolean) Due to historical reasons comments and name parts of email
addresses are removed by default when sending mail, replying to or
forwarding a message. If this variable is set such stripping is not
performed.
- fwdheading
- [Obsolete] Predecessor of forward-inject-head.
- header
- (Boolean) Causes the header summary to be written at startup and after
commands that affect the number of messages or the order of messages in
the current
folder . Unless in
posix mode a header summary will also be displayed
on folder changes. The command line option -N can
be used to set noheader.
- headline
- A format string to use for the summary of
headers .
Format specifiers in the given string start with a percent sign
‘% ’ and may be followed by an
optional decimal number indicating the field width — if that is
negative, the field is to be left-aligned. Names and addresses are subject
to modifications according to showname and
showto. Valid format specifiers are:
- ‘
%% ’
- A plain percent sign.
- ‘
%> ’
- “Dotmark”: a space character but for the current message
(“dot”), for which it expands to
‘
> ’ (dependent on
headline-plain).
- ‘
%< ’
- “Dotmark”: a space character but for the current message
(“dot”), for which it expands to
‘
< ’ (dependent on
headline-plain).
- ‘
%$ ’
- [Option] The spam score of the message, as has been classified via the
command
spamrate . Shows only a replacement
character if there is no spam support.
- ‘
%a ’
- Message attribute character (status flag); the actual content can be
adjusted by setting attrlist.
- ‘
%d ’
- The date found in the ‘
Date: ’
header of the message when datefield is set (the
default), otherwise the date when the message was received. Formatting
can be controlled by assigning a
strftime(3)
format string to datefield (and
datefield-markout-older).
- ‘
%e ’
- The indenting level in
‘
thread ’ed
sort mode.
- ‘
%f ’
- The address of the message sender.
- ‘
%i ’
- The message thread tree structure. (Note that this format does not
support a field width, and honours
headline-plain.)
- ‘
%L ’
- Mailing list status: is the addressee of the message a known
‘
l ’
(mlist ) or
‘L ’
mlsubscribe d mailing list? The letter
‘P ’ announces the presence of a
RFC 2369 ‘List-Post: ’ header,
which makes a message a valuable target of
Lreply .
- ‘
%l ’
- The number of lines of the message, if available.
- ‘
%m ’
- Message number.
- ‘
%o ’
- The number of octets (bytes) in the message, if available.
- ‘
%S ’
- Message subject (if any) in double quotes.
- ‘
%s ’
- Message subject (if any).
- ‘
%t ’
- The position in threaded/sorted order.
- ‘
%U ’
- The value 0 except in an IMAP mailbox, where it expands to the UID of
the message.
The default is
‘%>%a%m %-18f %16d %4l/%-5o %i%-s ’,
or
‘%>%a%m %20-f %16d %3l/%-5o %i%-S ’
if bsdcompat is set. Also see
attrlist, headline-plain and
headline-bidi.
- headline-bidi
- Bidirectional text requires special treatment when displaying headers,
because numbers (in dates or for file sizes etc.) will not affect the
current text direction, in effect resulting in ugly line layouts when
arabic or other right-to-left text is to be displayed. On the other hand
only a minority of terminals is capable to correctly handle direction
changes, so that user interaction is necessary for acceptable results.
Note that extended host system support is required nonetheless, e.g.,
detection of the terminal character set is one precondition; and this
feature only works in an Unicode (i.e., UTF-8) locale.
In general setting this variable will cause S-nail to
encapsulate text fields that may occur when displaying
headline (and some other fields, like dynamic
expansions in prompt) with special Unicode control
sequences; it is possible to fine-tune the terminal support level by
assigning a value: no value (or any value other than
‘1 ’,
‘2 ’ and
‘3 ’) will make S-nail assume that
the terminal is capable to properly deal with Unicode version 6.3, in
which case text is embedded in a pair of U+2068 (FIRST STRONG ISOLATE)
and U+2069 (POP DIRECTIONAL ISOLATE) characters. In addition no space on
the line is reserved for these characters.
Weaker support is chosen by using the value
‘1 ’ (Unicode 6.3, but reserve the
room of two spaces for writing the control sequences onto the line). The
values ‘2 ’ and
‘3 ’ select Unicode 1.1 support
(U+200E, LEFT-TO-RIGHT MARK); the latter again reserves room for two
spaces in addition.
- headline-plain
- (Boolean) On Unicode (UTF-8) aware terminals enhanced graphical symbols
are used by default for certain entries of headline.
If this variable is set only basic US-ASCII symbols will be used.
- history-file
- [Option] The (expandable) location of a permanent
history file for the MLE line editor
(On terminal
control and line editor). Also see
history-size.
- history-gabby
- [Option] Add more entries to the MLE
history as is
normally done. A comma-separated list of case-insensitive strings can be
used to fine-tune which gabby entries shall be allowed. If it contains
‘errors ’, erroneous commands will
also be added. ‘all ’ adds all
optional entries, and is the fallback chattiness identifier of
on-history-addition.
- history-gabby-persist
- (Boolean)[Option] The history-gabby entries will not
be saved in persistent storage unless this variable is set. The knowledge
of whether a persistent entry was gabby is not lost. Also see
history-file.
- history-size
- [Option] Setting this variable imposes a limit on the number of concurrent
history entries. If set to the value 0 then no
further history entries will be added, and loading and incorporation of
the history-file upon program startup can also be
suppressed by doing this. Runtime changes will not be reflected before the
history is saved or loaded (again).
- hold
- (Boolean) This setting controls whether messages are held in the system
inbox, and it is set by default.
- hostname
- Used instead of the value obtained from
uname(3)
and
getaddrinfo(3)
as the hostname when expanding local addresses, for example in
‘
From: ’ (also see
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode, for expansion of addresses that have a
valid user-, but no domain name in angle brackets). If either of
from or this variable is set the message and MIME
part related unique ID fields
‘Message-ID: ’ and
‘Content-ID: ’ will be created
(except when disallowed by message-id-disable or
stealthmua). If the [Option]al IDNA support is
available (see idna-disable) variable assignment is
aborted when a necessary conversion fails.
Setting it to the empty string will cause the normal hostname
to be used, but nonetheless enables creation of said ID fields.
[v15-compat] in conjunction with the built-in SMTP
mta smtp-hostname also
influences the results: one should produce some test messages with the
desired combination of hostname, and/or
from, sender etc. first.
- idna-disable
- (Boolean)[Option] Can be used to turn off the automatic conversion of
domain names according to the rules of IDNA (internationalized domain
names for applications). Since the IDNA code assumes that domain names are
specified with the ttycharset character set, an
UTF-8 locale charset is required to represent all possible international
domain names (before conversion, that is).
- ifs
- The input field separator that is used ([v15 behaviour may differ] by some
functions) to determine where to split input data.
- 1.
- Unsetting is treated as assigning the default value,
‘
\t\n ’.
- 2.
- If set to the empty value, no field splitting will be performed.
- 3.
- If set to a non-empty value, all whitespace characters are extracted
and assigned to the variable ifs-ws.
- a.
- ifs-ws will be ignored at the beginning and end
of input. Diverging from POSIX shells default whitespace is removed in
addition, which is owed to the entirely different line content
extraction rules.
- b.
- Each occurrence of a character of ifs will cause
field-splitting, any adjacent ifs-ws characters
will be skipped.
- ifs-ws
- (Read-only) Automatically deduced from the whitespace characters in
ifs.
- ignore
- (Boolean) Ignore interrupt signals from the terminal while entering
messages; instead echo them as ‘
@ ’
characters and discard the current line.
- ignoreeof
- (Boolean) Ignore end-of-file conditions
(‘
control-D ’) in
Compose mode on message input and
in interactive command input. If set an interactive command input session
can only be left by explicitly using one of the commands
exit and quit , and message
input in compose mode can only be terminated by entering a period
‘. ’ on a line by itself or by using
the ~.
COMMAND ESCAPES; Setting this
implies the behaviour that dot describes in
posix mode.
- inbox
- If this is set to a non-empty string it will specify the user's
primary system mailbox,
overriding
MAIL and the system-dependent default,
and (thus) be used to replace ‘% ’
when doing Filename
transformations; also see folder for more on
this topic. The value supports a subset of transformations itself.
- indentprefix
- String used by the
~m , ~M
and ~R
COMMAND ESCAPES and by the
quote option for indenting messages, in place of the
POSIX mandated default tabulator character
‘\t ’. Also see
quote-chars.
- keep
- (Boolean) If set, an empty
primary system mailbox
file is not removed. Note that, in conjunction with
posix mode any empty file will be removed unless
this variable is set. This may improve the interoperability with other
mail user agents when using a common folder directory, and prevents
malicious users from creating fake mailboxes in a world-writable spool
directory. [v15 behaviour may differ] Only local regular (MBOX) files are
covered, Maildir and other mailbox types will never be removed, even if
empty.
- keep-content-length
- (Boolean) When (editing messages and) writing MBOX mailbox files S-nail
can be told to keep the
‘
Content-Length: ’ and
‘Lines: ’ header fields that some
MUAs generate by setting this variable. Since S-nail does neither use nor
update these non-standardized header fields (which in itself shows one of
their conceptual problems), stripping them should increase
interoperability in between MUAs that work with with same mailbox files.
Note that, if this is not set but writebackedited,
as below, is, a possibly performed automatic stripping of these header
fields already marks the message as being modified. [v15 behaviour may
differ] At some future time S-nail will be capable to rewrite and apply an
mime-encoding to modified messages, and then those
fields will be stripped silently.
- keepsave
- (Boolean) When a message is saved it is usually discarded from the
originating folder when S-nail is quit. This setting causes all saved
message to be retained.
- line-editor-cpl-word-breaks
- [Option] List of bytes which are used by the
mle-complete tabulator completion to decide where
word boundaries exist, by default
‘"'@=;|: ’ [v15 behaviour may
differ] This mechanism is yet restricted.
- line-editor-disable
- (Boolean) Turn off any line editing capabilities (from S-nails POW, see
On terminal
control and line editor for more).
- line-editor-no-defaults
- (Boolean)[Option] Do not establish any default key binding.
- log-prefix
- Error log message prefix string (‘
s-nail:
’).
- mailbox-display
- (Read-only) The name of the current mailbox
(
folder ), possibly abbreviated for display
purposes.
- mailbox-resolved
- (Read-only) The fully resolved path of the current mailbox.
- mailcap-disable
- (Boolean)[Option] Turn off consideration of MIME type handlers from, and
implicit loading of The Mailcap
files.
- mailx-extra-rc
- An additional startup file that is loaded as the last of the
Resource files. Use this file for
commands that are not understood by other POSIX
mailx(1)
implementations, i.e., mostly anything which is not covered by
Initial settings.
- markanswered
- (Boolean) When a message is replied to and this variable is set, it is
marked as having been
answered . See the section
Message states.
- mbox-fcc-and-pcc
- (Boolean) By default all file and pipe message receivers (see
expandaddr) will be fed valid MBOX database entry
message data (see
folder ,
mbox-rfc4155), and existing file targets will become
extended in compliance to RFC 4155. If this variable is unset then a plain
standalone RFC 5322 message will be written, and existing file targets
will be overwritten.
- mbox-rfc4155
- (Boolean) When opening MBOX mailbox databases, and in order to achieve
compatibility with old software, the very tolerant POSIX standard rules
for detecting message boundaries (so-called
‘
From_ ’ lines) are used instead of
the stricter rules from the standard RFC 4155. This behaviour can be
switched by setting this variable.
This may temporarily be handy when S-nail complains about
invalid ‘From_ ’ lines when opening
a MBOX: in this case setting this variable and re-opening the mailbox in
question may correct the result. If so, copying the entire mailbox to
some other file, as in ‘copy *
SOME-FILE ’, will perform proper, all-compatible
‘From_ ’ quoting for all detected
messages, resulting in a valid MBOX mailbox. ([v15 behaviour may differ]
The better and non-destructive approach is to re-encode invalid
messages, as if it would be created anew, instead of mangling the
‘From_ ’ lines; this requires the
structural code changes of the v15 rewrite.) Finally the variable can be
unset again:
define mboxfix {
localopts yes; wysh set mbox-rfc4155;\
wysh File "${1}"; copy * "${2}"
}
call mboxfix /tmp/bad.mbox /tmp/good.mbox
- memdebug
- (Boolean) Internal development variable. (Keeps memory debug enabled even
if debug is not set.)
- message-id-disable
- (Boolean) By setting this variable the generation of
‘
Message-ID: ’ and
‘Content-ID: ’ message and MIME part
headers can be completely suppressed, effectively leaving this task up to
the mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent) or the SMTP server.
Note that according to RFC 5321 a SMTP server is not required to add this
field by itself, so it should be ensured that it accepts messages without
‘Message-ID ’.
- message-inject-head
- A string to put at the beginning of each new message, followed by a
newline. [Obsolete] The escape sequences tabulator
‘
\t ’ and newline
‘\n ’ are understood (use the
wysh prefix when set ting
the variable(s) instead).
- message-inject-tail
- A string to put at the end of each new message, followed by a newline.
[Obsolete] The escape sequences tabulator
‘
\t ’ and newline
‘\n ’ are understood (use the
wysh prefix when set ting
the variable(s) instead). Also see
on-compose-leave.
- metoo
- (Boolean) Usually, when an
alias expansion
contains the sender, the sender is removed from the expansion. Setting
this option suppresses these removals. Note that a set
metoo also causes a
‘-m ’ option to be passed through to
the mta (Mail-Transfer-Agent); though most of the
modern MTAs no longer document this flag, no MTA is known which does not
support it (for historical compatibility).
- mime-allow-text-controls
- (Boolean) When sending messages, each part of the message is
MIME-inspected in order to classify the
‘
Content-Type: ’ and
‘Content-Transfer-Encoding: ’ (see
mime-encoding) that is required to send this part
over mail transport, i.e., a computation rather similar to what the
file(1)
command produces when used with the
‘--mime ’ option.
This classification however treats text files which are
encoded in UTF-16 (seen for HTML files) and similar character sets as
binary octet-streams, forcefully changing any
‘text/plain ’ or
‘text/html ’ specification to
‘application/octet-stream ’: If
that actually happens a yet unset charset MIME parameter is set to
‘binary ’, effectively making it
impossible for the receiving MUA to automatically interpret the contents
of the part.
If this variable is set, and the data was unambiguously
identified as text data at first glance (by a
‘.txt ’ or
‘.html ’ file extension), then the
original ‘Content-Type: ’ will not
be overwritten.
- mime-alternative-favour-rich
- (Boolean) If this variable is set then rich MIME alternative parts (e.g.,
HTML) will be preferred in favour of included plain text versions when
displaying messages, provided that a handler exists which produces output
that can be (re)integrated into S-nail's normal visual display.
- mime-counter-evidence
- Normally the ‘
Content-Type: ’ field
is used to decide how to handle MIME parts. Some MUAs, however, do not use
The mime.types files (also
see HTML mail and
MIME attachments) or a similar mechanism to correctly classify
content, but specify an unspecific MIME type
(‘application/octet-stream ’) even
for plain text attachments. If this variable is set then S-nail will try
to re-classify such MIME message parts, if possible, for example via a
possibly existing attachment filename. A non-empty value may also be
given, in which case a number is expected, actually a carrier of bits,
best specified as a binary value, like
‘0b1111 ’.
- If bit two is set (counting from 1, decimal 2) then the detected
mimetype will be carried along with the
message and be used for deciding which MIME handler is to be used, for
example; when displaying such a MIME part the part-info will indicate
the overridden content-type by showing a plus sign
‘+ ’.
- If bit three is set (decimal 4) then the counter-evidence is always
produced and a positive result will be used as the MIME type, even
forcefully overriding the parts given MIME type.
- If bit four is set (decimal 8) as a last resort the actual content of
‘
application/octet-stream ’ parts
will be inspected, so that data which looks like plain text can be
treated as such. This mode is even more relaxed when data is to be
displayed to the user or used as a message quote (data consumers which
mangle data for display purposes, which includes masking of control
characters, for example).
- mime-encoding
- The MIME ‘
Content-Transfer-Encoding ’
to use in outgoing text messages and message parts, where applicable
(7-bit clean text messages are without an encoding if possible):
- ‘
8bit ’
- (Or ‘
8b ’.) 8-bit
transport effectively causes the raw data be passed through unchanged,
but may cause problems when transferring mail messages over channels
that are not ESMTP (RFC 1869) compliant. Also, several input data
constructs are not allowed by the specifications and may cause a
different transfer-encoding to be used. By established rules and
popular demand occurrences of
‘^From_ ’ (see
mbox-rfc4155) will be MBOXO quoted (prefixed
with greater-than sign ‘> ’)
instead of causing a non-destructive encoding like
‘quoted-printable ’ to be chosen,
unless context (like message signing) requires otherwise.
- ‘
quoted-printable ’
- (Or ‘
qp ’.)
Quoted-printable encoding is 7-bit clean and has the property that
ASCII characters are passed through unchanged, so that an english
message can be read as-is; it is also acceptable for other single-byte
locales that share many characters with ASCII, for example ISO-8859-1.
The encoding will cause a large overhead for messages in other
character sets: for example it will require up to twelve (12) bytes to
encode a single UTF-8 character of four (4) bytes. It is the default
encoding.
- ‘
base64 ’
- (Or ‘
b64 ’.) This encoding
is 7-bit clean and will always be used for binary data. This encoding
has a constant input:output ratio of 3:4, regardless of the character
set of the input data it will encode three bytes of input to four
bytes of output. This transfer-encoding is not human readable without
performing a decoding step.
- mime-force-sendout
- (Boolean)[Option] Whenever it is not acceptable to fail sending out
messages because of non-convertible character content this variable may be
set. It will, as a last resort, classify the part content as
‘
application/octet-stream ’. Please
refer to the section Character
sets for the complete picture of character set conversion, and
HTML mail and MIME
attachments for how to internally or externally handle part
content.
- mimetypes-load-control
- Can be used to control which of
The mime.types files are
loaded: if the letter ‘
u ’ is part of
the option value, then the user's personal
~/.mime.types file will be loaded (if it exists);
likewise the letter ‘s ’ controls
loading of the system wide
/usr/local/etc/mime.types; directives found in the
user file take precedence, letter matching is case-insensitive. If this
variable is not set S-nail will try to load both files. Incorporation of
the S-nail-built-in MIME types cannot be suppressed, but they will be
matched last (the order can be listed via
mimetype ).
More sources can be specified by using a different syntax: if
the value string contains an equals sign
‘= ’ then it is instead parsed as a
comma-separated list of the described letters plus
‘f=FILENAME ’ pairs; the given
filenames will be expanded and loaded, and their content may use the
extended syntax that is described in the section
The mime.types files.
Directives found in such files always take precedence (are prepended to
the MIME type cache).
- mta
- Select an alternate Mail-Transfer-Agent by either specifying the full
pathname of an executable (a
‘
file:// ’ prefix may be given), or
[Option]ally a SMTP aka SUBMISSION protocol URL [v15-compat]:
submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port]
([no v15-compat]:
‘[smtp://]server[:port] ’.) The
default has been chosen at compile time. MTA data transfers are always
performed in asynchronous child processes, and without supervision
unless either the sendwait or the
verbose variable is set. Also see
mta-bcc-ok. [Option]ally expansion of
aliases(5)
can be performed by setting mta-aliases.
For testing purposes there is the
‘test ’ pseudo-MTA, which dumps to
standard output or optionally to a file, and honours
mbox-fcc-and-pcc:
$ echo text | s-nail -:/ -Smta=test -s ubject ex@am.ple
$ </dev/null s-nail -:/ -Smta=test://./xy ex@am.ple
For a file-based MTA it may be necessary to set
mta-argv0 in in order to choose the right target
of a modern
mailwrapper(8)
environment. It will be passed command line arguments from several
possible sources: from the variable mta-arguments
if set, from the command line if given and the variable
expandargv allows their use. Argument processing
of the MTA will be terminated with a --
separator.
The otherwise occurring implicit usage of the following MTA
command line arguments can be disabled by setting the boolean variable
mta-no-default-arguments (which will also disable
passing -- to the MTA):
-i (for not treating a line with only a dot
‘. ’ character as the end of
input), -m (shall the variable
metoo be set) and -v (if
the verbose variable is set); in conjunction with
the -r command line option or
r-option-implicit -f as
well as possibly -F will (not) be passed.
[Option]ally S-nail can send mail over SMTP aka SUBMISSION
network connections to a single defined smart host by setting this
variable to a SMTP or SUBMISSION URL (see
On URL syntax
and credential lookup). An authentication scheme can be specified
via the variable chain smtp-auth. Encrypted
network connections are [Option]ally available, the section
Encrypted network
communication should give an overview and provide links to more
information on this. Note that with some mail providers it may be
necessary to set the smtp-hostname variable in
order to use a specific combination of from,
hostname and mta. Network
communication socket timeouts are configurable via
socket-connect-timeout. All generated network
traffic may be proxied over a SOCKS socks-proxy,
it can be logged by setting verbose twice. The
following SMTP variants may be used:
- The plain SMTP protocol (RFC 5321) that normally lives on the server
port 25 and requires setting the
smtp-use-starttls variable to enter a TLS
encrypted session state. Assign a value like [v15-compat]
‘
smtp://[user[:password]@]server[:port] ’
([no v15-compat]
‘smtp://server[:port] ’) to
choose this protocol.
- The so-called SMTPS which is supposed to live on server port 465 and
is automatically TLS secured. Unfortunately it never became a
standardized protocol and may thus not be supported by your hosts
network service database – in fact the port number has already
been reassigned to other protocols!
SMTPS is nonetheless a commonly offered protocol and thus
can be chosen by assigning a value like [v15-compat]
‘smtps://[user[:password]@]server[:port] ’
([no v15-compat]
‘smtps://server[:port] ’); due
to the mentioned problems it is usually necessary to explicitly
specify the port as ‘:465 ’,
however.
- The SUBMISSION protocol (RFC 6409) lives on server port 587 and is
identically to the SMTP protocol from S-nail's point of view; it
requires setting smtp-use-starttls to enter a
TLS secured session state; e.g., [v15-compat]
‘
submission://[user[:password]@]server[:port] ’.
- The SUBMISSIONS protocol (RFC 8314) that lives on server port 465 and
is TLS secured by default. It can be chosen by assigning a value like
[v15-compat]
‘
submissions://[user[:password]@]server[:port] ’.
Due to the problems mentioned for SMTPS above and the fact that
SUBMISSIONS is new and a successor that lives on the same port as the
historical engineering mismanagement named SMTPS, it is usually
necessary to explicitly specify the port as
‘:465 ’.
- mta-aliases
- [Option] If set to a path pointing to a text file in valid MTA (Postfix)
aliases(5)
format, the file is loaded and cached (manageable with
mtaaliases ), and henceforth plain
‘name ’ (see
expandaddr) message receiver names are recursively
expanded as a last expansion step, after the distribution lists which can
be created with alias . Constraints on
aliases(5)
content support: only local addresses (names) which are valid usernames
(‘[a-z_][a-z0-9_-]*[$]? ’) are
treated as expandable aliases, and [v15 behaviour may differ]
‘:include:/file/name ’ directives are
not supported. By including ‘-name ’
in expandaddr it can be asserted that only expanded
names (mail addresses) are passed through to the MTA.
- mta-arguments
- Arguments to pass through to a file-based mta
(Mail-Transfer-Agent), parsed according to
Shell-style argument
quoting into an array of arguments which will be joined onto MTA
options from other sources, for example ‘
? wysh
set mta-arguments='-t -X "/tmp/my log"' ’.
- mta-no-default-arguments
- (Boolean) Avoids passing standard command line options to a file-based
mta (please see there).
- mta-no-receiver-arguments
- (Boolean) By default all receiver addresses will be passed as command line
options to a file-based mta. Setting this variable
disables this behaviour to aid those MTAs which employ special treatment
of such arguments. Doing so can make it necessary to pass a
-t via mta-arguments, to
testify the MTA that it should use the passed message as a template.
- mta-argv0
- Many systems use a so-called
mailwrapper(8)
environment to ensure compatibility with
sendmail(1).
This works by inspecting the name that was used to invoke the mail
delivery system. If this variable is set then the mailwrapper (the program
that is actually executed when calling the file-based
mta) will treat its contents as that name.
- mta-bcc-ok
- (Boolean) In violation of RFC 5322 some MTAs do not remove
‘
Bcc: ’ header lines from transported
messages after having noted the respective receivers for addressing
purposes. (The MTAs Exim and Courier for example require the command line
option -t to enforce removal.) Unless this is set
corresponding receivers are addressed by protocol-specific means or MTA
command line options only, the header itself is stripped before being sent
over the wire.
- netrc-lookup-USER@HOST,
netrc-lookup-HOST,
netrc-lookup
- (Boolean)[v15-compat][Option] Used to control usage of the user's
~/.netrc file for lookup of account credentials,
as documented in the section
On URL syntax
and credential lookup and for the command
netrc ; the section
The .netrc file documents the
file format. Also see netrc-pipe.
- netrc-pipe
- [v15-compat][Option] When ~/.netrc is loaded (see
netrc and netrc-lookup) then
S-nail will read the output of a shell pipe instead of the user's
~/.netrc file if this variable is set (to the
desired shell command). This can be used to, for example, store
~/.netrc in encrypted form:
‘? set netrc-pipe='gpg -qd
~/.netrc.pgp' ’.
- newfolders
- [Option] If this variable has the value
‘
maildir ’, newly created local
folders will be in Maildir instead of MBOX format.
- newmail
- Checks for new mail in the current folder each time the prompt is shown. A
Maildir folder must be re-scanned to determine if new mail has arrived. If
this variable is set to the special value
‘
nopoll ’ then a Maildir folder will
not be rescanned completely, but only timestamp changes are detected.
Maildir folders are [Option]al.
- outfolder
- (Boolean) Causes a non-absolute filename specified in
record, as well as the sender-based filenames of the
Copy , Save ,
Followup and followup
commands to be interpreted relative to the folder
directory rather than relative to the current directory.
- on-account-cleanup-ACCOUNT,
on-account-cleanup
- Macro hook which will be called once an
account is
left, as the very last step before unrolling per-account
localopts . This hook is run even in case of fatal
errors, including those generated by switching to the account as such, and
it is advisable to perform only absolutely necessary actions, like
cleaning up alternates , for example. The
specialized form is used in favour of the generic one if found.
- on-compose-cleanup
- Macro hook which will be called after the message has been sent (or not,
in case of failures), as the very last step before unrolling compose mode
localopts . This hook is run even in case of fatal
errors, and it is advisable to perform only absolutely necessary actions,
like cleaning up alternates , for example.
For compose mode hooks that may affect the message content
please see on-compose-enter,
on-compose-leave,
on-compose-splice. [v15 behaviour may differ] This
hook exists because alias ,
alternates ,
commandalias , shortcut ,
to name a few, are neither covered by localopts
nor by local : changes applied in compose mode
will continue to be in effect thereafter.
- on-compose-enter,
on-compose-leave
- Macro hooks which will be called once compose mode is entered, and after
composing has been finished, respectively; the exact order of the steps
taken is documented for
~. , one of the
COMMAND ESCAPES. Context about
the message being worked on can be queried via
digmsg . localopts are
enabled for these hooks, and changes on variables will be forgotten after
the message has been sent. on-compose-cleanup can be
used to perform other necessary cleanup steps.
Here is an example that injects a signature via
message-inject-tail; instead using
on-compose-splice to simply inject the file of
desire via ~< or
~<! may be a better approach.
define t_ocl {
vput ! i cat ~/.mysig
if $? -eq 0
vput csop message-inject-tail trim-end $i
end
# Alternatively
readctl create ~/.mysig
if $? -eq 0
readall i
if $? -eq 0
vput csop message-inject-tail trim-end $i
end
readctl remove ~/.mysig
end
}
set on-compose-leave=t_ocl
- on-compose-splice,
on-compose-splice-shell
- These hooks run once the normal compose mode is finished, but before the
on-compose-leave macro hook is called etc. Both
hooks will be executed in a subprocess, with their input and output
connected to S-nail such that they can act as if they would be an
interactive user. The difference in between them is that the latter is a
SHELL command, whereas the former is a normal
define d macro, but which is restricted to a small
set of commands (the verbose output of for example
list will indicate said capability).
localopts are enabled for these hooks (in the
parent process), causing any setting to be forgotten after the message has
been sent; on-compose-cleanup can be used to perform
other cleanup as necessary.
During execution of these hooks S-nail will temporarily forget
whether it has been started in interactive mode, (a restricted set of)
COMMAND ESCAPES will always be
available, and for guaranteed reproducibilities sake
escape and ifs will be set
to their defaults. The compose mode command ~^
has been especially designed for scriptability (via these hooks). The
first line the hook will read on its standard input is the protocol
version of said command escape, currently “0 0 2”:
backward incompatible protocol changes have to be expected.
Care must be taken to avoid deadlocks and other false control
flow: if both involved processes wait for more input to happen at the
same time, or one does not expect more input but the other is stuck
waiting for consumption of its output, etc. There is no automatic
synchronization of the hook: it will not be stopped automatically just
because it, e.g., emits ‘~x ’. The
hooks will however receive a termination signal if the parent enters an
error condition. [v15 behaviour may differ] Protection against and
interaction with signals is not yet given; it is likely that in the
future these scripts will be placed in an isolated session, which is
signalled in its entirety as necessary.
define ocs_signature {
read version
echo '~< ~/.mysig' # '~<! fortune pathtofortunefile'
}
set on-compose-splice=ocs_signature
wysh set on-compose-splice-shell=$'\
read version;\
printf "hello $version! Headers: ";\
echo \'~^header list\';\
read status result;\
echo "status=$status result=$result";\
'
define ocsm {
read version
echo Splice protocol version is $version
echo '~^h l'; read hl; vput csop es subs "${hl}" 0 1
if "$es" != 2
echoerr 'Cannot read header list'; echo '~x'; xit
endif
if "$hl" !%?case ' cc'
echo '~^h i cc "Diet is your <mirr.or>"'; read es;\
vput csop es substring "${es}" 0 1
if "$es" != 2
echoerr 'Cannot insert Cc: header'; echo '~x'
# (no xit, macro finishes anyway)
endif
endif
}
set on-compose-splice=ocsm
- on-history-addition
- This hook will be called if an entry is about to be added to the
history of the MLE, as documented in
On terminal
control and line editor. It will be called with three arguments: the
first is the name of the input context (see bind ),
the second is either an empty string or the matching
history-gabby type, and the third being the complete
command line to be added. The entry will not be added to history if the
hook uses a non-0 return . [v15 behaviour may
differ] A future version will give the expanded command name as the third
argument, followed by the tokenized command line as parsed in the
remaining arguments, the first of which is the original unexpanded command
name; i.e., one may do
‘shift 4 ’
and will then be able to access the positional parameters as usual via
*, #, 1
etc.
- on-main-loop-tick
- This hook will be called whenever the program's main event loop is about
to read the next input line. Note variable and other changes it performs
are not scoped as via
localopts !
- on-program-exit
- This hook will be called when the program exits, whether via
exit or quit , or because
the send mode is done. Note: this runs late and so
terminal settings etc. are already teared down.
- on-resend-cleanup
- [v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to
on-compose-cleanup, but is only triggered by
resend .
- on-resend-enter
- [v15 behaviour may differ] Identical to
on-compose-enter, but is only triggered by
resend ; currently there is no
digmsg support, for example.
- page
- (Boolean) If set, each message feed through the command given for
pipe is followed by a formfeed character
‘\f ’.
- password-USER@HOST,
password-HOST, password
- [v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a password, which is used in case
none has been given in the protocol and account-specific URL; as a last
resort S-nail will ask for a password on the user's terminal if the
authentication method requires a password. Specifying passwords in a
startup file is generally a security risk; the file should be readable by
the invoking user only.
- password-USER@HOST
- [no v15-compat] (see the chain above for [v15-compat]) Set the password
for ‘
USER ’ when connecting to
‘HOST ’. If no such variable is
defined for a host, the user will be asked for a password on standard
input. Specifying passwords in a startup file is generally a security
risk; the file should be readable by the invoking user only.
- piperaw
- (Boolean) Send messages to the
pipe command
without performing MIME and character set conversions.
- pipe-EXTENSION
- Identical to pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE except that
‘
EXTENSION ’ (normalized to lowercase
using character mappings of the ASCII charset) denotes a file extension,
for example ‘xhtml ’. Handlers
registered using this method take precedence.
- pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE
- A MIME message part identified as
‘
TYPE/SUBTYPE ’ (case-insensitive,
normalized to lowercase using character mappings of the ASCII charset) is
displayed or quoted, its text is filtered through the value of this
variable interpreted as a shell command. Unless noted only parts
displayable as inline plain text (see
copiousoutput ) are covered, other MIME parts will
only be considered by and for mimeview .
The special value question mark
‘? ’ forces interpretation of the
message part as plain text, for example ‘set
pipe-application/xml=? ’. (This can also be achieved by
adding a MIME type-marker via mimetype .)
[Option]ally MIME type handlers may be defined via
The Mailcap files to which
should be referred to for documentation of flags like
copiousoutput . Question mark is indeed a trigger
character to indicate flags that adjust behaviour and usage of the rest
of the value, the shell command, for example:
? set pipe-X/Y='?!++=? vim ${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}'
- ‘
* ’
- The command output can be reintegrated into this MUA's normal
processing:
copiousoutput . Implied when using
a plain ‘ ’.
- ‘
# ’
- Only use this handler for display, not for quoting a message:
x-mailx-noquote .
- ‘
& ’
- Run the command asynchronously, do not wait for the handler to exit:
x-mailx-async . The standard output of the
command will go to /dev/null.
- ‘
! ’
- The command must be run on an interactive terminal, the terminal will
temporarily be released for it to run:
needsterminal .
- ‘
+ ’
- Request creation of a zero-sized temporary file, the absolute pathname
of which will be made accessible via the environment variable
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY :
x-mailx-tmpfile . If given twice then the file
will be unlinked automatically by S-nail when the command loop is
entered again at latest:
x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink ; it is an error to use
automatic deletion in conjunction with
x-mailx-async .
- ‘
= ’
- Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard
input; with this the data will instead be written into
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY
(x-mailx-tmpfile-fill ), the creation of which
is implied; in order to cause automatic deletion of the temporary file
two plus signs ‘++ ’ still have
to be used.
- ‘
t ’
- Text type-marker: display this as normal plain text (for type-markers:
The mime.types files).
Identical to only giving plain
‘
? ’, implies
copiousoutput .
- ‘
h ’
- [Option] HTML type-marker: display via built-in HTML-to-text filter.
Implies
copiousoutput .
- ‘
? ’
- To avoid ambiguities with normal shell command content another
question mark can be used to forcefully terminate interpretation of
remaining characters. (Any character not in this list will have the
same effect.)
Some information about the MIME part to be displayed is
embedded into the environment of the shell command:
MAILX_CONTENT
- The MIME content-type of the part, if known, the empty string
otherwise.
MAILX_CONTENT_EVIDENCE
- If mime-counter-evidence includes the
carry-around-bit (2), then this will be set to the detected MIME
content-type; not only then identical to
MAILX_CONTENT otherwise.
MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL
- MIME parts of type ‘
message/external-body
access-type=url ’ will store the access URL in this
variable, it is empty otherwise. URL targets should not be activated
automatically, without supervision.
MAILX_FILENAME
- The filename, if any is set, the empty string otherwise.
MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED
- A random string.
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY
- If temporary file creation has been requested through the command
prefix this variable will be set and contain the absolute pathname of
the temporary file.
- pop3-auth-USER@HOST,
pop3-auth-HOST, pop3-auth
- [Option][v15-compat] Variable chain that sets the POP3 authentication
method. Supported are the default
‘
plain ’, [v15-compat]
‘oauthbearer ’ (see
FAQ entry
But, how about
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?), as well as [v15-compat]
‘external ’ and
‘externanon ’ for TLS secured
connections which pass a client certificate via
tls-config-pairs. There may be the [Option]al method
[v15-compat] ‘gssapi ’.
‘externanon ’ does not need any user
credentials, ‘external ’ and
‘gssapi ’ need a
user, the remains also require a
password.
‘externanon ’ solely builds upon the
credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go
since tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422, and fail if
additional credentials are actually passed. Unless
pop3-no-apop is set the
‘plain ’ method will [Option]ally be
replaced with APOP if possible (see there).
- pop3-bulk-load-USER@HOST,
pop3-bulk-load-HOST,
pop3-bulk-load
- (Boolean)[Option] When accessing a POP3 server S-nail loads the headers of
the messages, and only requests the message bodies on user request. For
the POP3 protocol this means that the message headers will be downloaded
twice. If this variable is set then S-nail will download only complete
messages from the given POP3 server(s) instead.
- pop3-keepalive-USER@HOST,
pop3-keepalive-HOST,
pop3-keepalive
- [Option] POP3 servers close the connection after a period of inactivity;
the standard requires this to be at least 10 minutes, but practical
experience may vary. Setting this variable to a numeric value greater than
‘
0 ’ causes a
‘NOOP ’ command to be sent each value
seconds if no other operation is performed.
- pop3-no-apop-USER@HOST,
pop3-no-apop-HOST,
pop3-no-apop
- (Boolean)[Option] Unless this variable is set the MD5 based
‘
APOP ’ authentication method will be
used instead of a chosen ‘plain ’
pop3-auth when connecting to a POP3 server that
advertises support. The advantage of
‘APOP ’ is that only a single packet
is sent for the user/password tuple. (Originally also that the password is
not sent in clear text over the wire, but for one MD5 does not any longer
offer sufficient security, and then today transport is almost ever TLS
secured.) Note that pop3-no-apop-HOST requires
[v15-compat].
- pop3-use-starttls-USER@HOST,
pop3-use-starttls-HOST,
pop3-use-starttls
- (Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to issue a
‘
STLS ’ command to make an
unencrypted POP3 session TLS encrypted. This functionality is not
supported by all servers, and is not used if the session is already
encrypted by the POP3S method. Note that
pop3-use-starttls-HOST requires [v15-compat].
- posix
- (Boolean) This flag enables POSIX mode, which changes behaviour of S-nail
where that deviates from standardized behaviour. It is automatically
squared with the environment variable
POSIXLY_CORRECT , changing the one will adjust the
other. The following behaviour is covered and enforced by this mechanism:
- In non-interactive mode, any error encountered while loading resource
files during program startup will cause a program exit, whereas in
interactive mode such errors will stop loading of the currently loaded
(stack of) file(s, i.e., recursively). These exits can be circumvented
on a per-command base by using
ignerr , one of
the Command modifiers, for
each command which shall be allowed to fail.
alternates
will replace the list of alternate addresses instead of appending to
it. In addition alternates will only be honoured for any sort of
message reply , and for aliases.
- The variable inserting COMMAND
ESCAPES
~A , ~a ,
~I and ~i will expand
embedded character sequences
‘\t ’ horizontal tabulator and
‘\n ’ line feed. [v15 behaviour
may differ] For compatibility reasons this step will always be
performed.
- Reading in messages via
~f
(COMMAND ESCAPES) will use
the ‘type ’ not the
‘forward ’
headerpick selection.
- Upon changing the active
folder no summary of
headers will be displayed even if
header is set.
- Setting ignoreeof implies the behaviour
described by dot.
- The variable keep is extended to cover any empty
mailbox, not only empty
primary system
mailboxes: they will be removed when they are left in empty state
otherwise.
- Each command has an exit ? and error
! status that overwrites that of the last
command. In POSIX mode the program exit status will signal failure
regardless unless all messages were successfully sent out to the
mta; also see
sendwait.
- print-alternatives
- (Boolean) When a MIME message part of type
‘
multipart/alternative ’ is displayed
and it contains a subpart of type
‘text/plain ’, other parts are
normally discarded. Setting this variable causes all subparts to be
displayed, just as if the surrounding part was of type
‘multipart/mixed ’.
- prompt
- The string used as a prompt in interactive mode. Whenever the variable is
evaluated the value is treated as if specified within dollar-single-quotes
(see Shell-style
argument quoting). This (post-assignment, i.e., second) expansion can
be used to embed status information, for example ?,
!, account or
mailbox-display.
In order to embed characters which should not be counted when
calculating the visual width of the resulting string, enclose the
characters of interest in a pair of reverse solidus escaped brackets:
‘\[\E[0m\] ’; a slot for coloured
prompts is also available with the [Option]al command
colour . Prompting may be prevented by setting
this to the null string (aka ‘set
noprompt ’).
- prompt2
- This string is used for secondary prompts, but is otherwise identical to
prompt. The default is
‘
.. ’.
- quiet
- (Boolean) Suppresses the printing of the version when first invoked.
- quote
- If set messages processed by variants of
followup
and reply will start with the original message,
lines of which prefixed by indentprefix, taking into
account quote-chars and
quote-fold. No headers will be quoted when set
without value or for ‘noheading ’,
for ‘headers ’ the
‘type ’
headerpick selection will be included in the
quote, ‘allbodies ’ embeds the (body)
contents of all MIME parts, and
‘allheaders ’ also includes all
headers. The quoted message will be enclosed by the expansions of
quote-inject-head and
quote-inject-tail. Also see
quote-add-cc,
quote-as-attachment and ~Q ,
one of the COMMAND ESCAPES.
- quote-add-cc
- (Boolean) Whether senders of messages quoted via
~Q shall be made members of the carbon copies
‘Cc: ’ list.
- quote-as-attachment
- (Boolean) Add the original message in its entirety as a
‘
message/rfc822 ’ MIME attachment
when replying to a message. Note this works regardless of the setting of
quote.
- quote-chars
- Can be set to a string consisting of non-whitespace ASCII characters which
shall be treated as quotation leaders, the default being
‘
>|}: ’.
- quote-fold
- [Option] Can be set in addition to indentprefix, and
creates a more fancy quotation in that leading quotation characters
(quote-chars) are compressed and overlong lines are
folded. quote-fold can be set to either one, two or
three (space separated) numeric values, which are interpreted as the
maximum (goal) and the minimum line length, respectively, in a spirit
rather equal to the
fmt(1)
program, but line- instead of paragraph-based. The third value is used as
the maximum line length instead of the first if no better break point can
be found; it is ignored unless it is larger than the minimum and smaller
than the maximum. If not set explicitly the minimum will reflect the goal
algorithmically. The goal cannot be smaller than the length of
indentprefix plus some additional pad; necessary
adjustments take place silently.
- quote-inject-head,
quote-inject-tail
- The strings to put before and after the text of a
quoted message, if non-empty, and respectively. The
former defaults to ‘
%f wrote:\n\n ’.
Special format directives will be expanded if possible, and if so
configured the output will be folded according to
quote-fold. Format specifiers in the given strings
start with a percent sign ‘% ’ and
expand values of the original message, unless noted otherwise. Note that
names and addresses are not subject to the setting of
showto. Valid format specifiers are:
- ‘
%% ’
- A plain percent sign.
- ‘
%a ’
- The address(es) of the sender(s).
- ‘
%d ’
- The date found in the ‘
Date: ’
header of the message when datefield is set (the
default), otherwise the date when the message was received. Formatting
can be controlled by assigning a
strftime(3)
format string to datefield (and
datefield-markout-older).
- ‘
%f ’
- The full name(s) (name and address, as given) of the sender(s).
- ‘
%i ’
- The ‘
Message-ID: ’.
- ‘
%n ’
- The real name(s) of the sender(s) if there is one and
showname allows usage, the address(es)
otherwise.
- ‘
%r ’
- The senders real name(s) if there is one, the address(es)
otherwise.
- r-option-implicit
- (Boolean) Setting this option evaluates the contents of
from (or, if that contains multiple addresses,
sender) and passes the results onto the used
(file-based) MTA as described for the
-r option
(empty argument case).
- recipients-in-cc
- (Boolean) When doing a
reply , the original
‘From: ’ and
‘To: ’ as well as addressees which
possibly came in via ‘Reply-To: ’ and
‘Mail-Followup-To: ’ are by default
merged into the new ‘To: ’. If this
variable is set a sensitive algorithm tries to place in
‘To: ’ only the sender of the message
being replied to, others are placed in
‘Cc: ’.
- record
- Unless this variable is defined, no copies of outgoing mail will be saved.
If defined it gives the pathname, subject to the usual
Filename
transformations, of a folder where all new, replied-to or forwarded
messages are saved: when saving to this folder fails the message is not
sent, but instead saved to
DEAD . The standard defines that relative (fully
expanded) paths are to be interpreted relative to the current directory
(cwd ), to force interpretation relative to
folder outfolder needs to be
set in addition.
- record-files
- (Boolean) If this variable is set the meaning of
record will be extended to cover messages which
target only file and pipe recipients (see
expandaddr). These address types will not appear in
recipient lists unless add-file-recipients is also
set.
- record-resent
- (Boolean) If this variable is set the meaning of
record will be extended to also cover the
resend and Resend
commands.
- reply-in-same-charset
- (Boolean) If this variable is set S-nail first tries to use the same
character set of the original message for replies. If this fails, the
mechanism described in Character
sets is evaluated as usual.
- reply-strings
- Can be set to a comma-separated list of (case-insensitive according to
ASCII rules) strings which shall be recognized in addition to the built-in
strings as ‘
Subject: ’ reply message
indicators – built-in are
‘Re: ’, which is mandated by RFC
5322, as well as the german ‘Aw: ’,
‘Antw: ’, and the
‘Wg: ’ which often has been seen in
the wild; I.e., the separating colon has to be specified explicitly.
- reply-to
- A list of addresses to put into the
‘
Reply-To: ’ field of the message
header. Members of this list are handled as if they were in the
alternates list.
- replyto
- [Obsolete] Variant of reply-to.
- reply-to-honour
- Controls whether a ‘
Reply-To: ’
header is honoured when replying to a message via
reply or Lreply . This is a
quadoption; if set without a value it
defaults to “yes”.
- reply-to-swap-in
- Standards like DKIM and (in conjunction with) DMARC caused many
Mailing lists to use sender
address rewriting in the style of ‘
Name via List
<list@address> ’, where the original sender address
often being placed in ‘Reply-To: ’.
If this is set and a ‘Reply-To: ’
exists, and consists of only one addressee (!), then that is used in place
of the pretended sender. This works independently from
reply-to-honour. The optional value, a
comma-separated list of strings, offers more fine-grained control on when
swapping shall be used; for now supported is mlist,
here swapping occurs if the sender is a mailing-list as defined by
mlist .
- rfc822-body-from_
- (Boolean) This variable can be used to force displaying a so-called
‘
From_ ’ line for messages that are
embedded into an envelope mail via the
‘message/rfc822 ’ MIME mechanism, for
more visual convenience, also see mbox-rfc4155.
- save
- (Boolean) Enable saving of (partial) messages in
DEAD upon interrupt or delivery error.
- screen
- The number of lines that represents a “screenful” of lines,
used in
headers summary display,
from search ing, message
top line display and scrolling via
z . If this variable is not set S-nail falls back
to a calculation based upon the detected terminal window size and the baud
rate: the faster the terminal, the more will be shown. Overall screen
dimensions and pager usage is influenced by the environment variables
COLUMNS and LINES and the
variable crt.
- searchheaders
- (Boolean) Expand message list specifiers in the form
‘
/x:y ’ to all messages containing
the substring “y” in the header field
‘x ’. The string search is case
insensitive.
- sendcharsets
- [Option] A comma-separated list of character set names that can be used in
outgoing internet mail. The value of the variable
charset-8bit is automatically appended to this list
of character sets. If no character set conversion capabilities are
compiled into S-nail then the only supported charset is
ttycharset. Also see
sendcharsets-else-ttycharset and refer to the
section Character sets for the
complete picture of character set conversion in S-nail.
- sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
- (Boolean)[Option] If this variable is set, but
sendcharsets is not, then S-nail acts as if
sendcharsets had been set to the value of the
variable ttycharset. In effect this combination
passes through the message data in the character set of the current locale
encoding: therefore mail message text will be (assumed to be) in
ISO-8859-1 encoding when send from within a ISO-8859-1 locale, and in
UTF-8 encoding when send from within an UTF-8 locale.
The 8-bit fallback charset-8bit never
comes into play as ttycharset is implicitly
assumed to be 8-bit and capable to represent all files the user may
specify (as is the case when no character set conversion support is
available in S-nail and the only supported character set is
ttycharset, see
Character sets). This might be
a problem for scripts which use the suggested
‘LC_ALL=C ’ setting, since in this
case the character set is US-ASCII by definition, so that it is better
to also override ttycharset, then; and/or do
something like the following in the resource file:
# Avoid ASCII "propagates to 8-bit" when scripting
\if ! t && "$LC_ALL" != C && "$LC_CTYPE" != C
\set sendcharsets-else-ttycharset
\end
- sender
- An address that is put into the
‘
Sender: ’ field of outgoing
messages, quoting RFC 5322: the mailbox of the agent responsible for the
actual transmission of the message. This field should normally not be used
unless the from field contains more than one
address, on which case it is required. [v15 behaviour may differ] Please
expect automatic management of the from and
sender relationship. Dependent on the context this
address is handled as if it were in the list of
alternates . Also see -r ,
r-option-implicit.
- sendmail
- [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta.
- sendmail-arguments
- [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-arguments.
- sendmail-no-default-arguments
- [Obsolete](Boolean) Predecessor of
mta-no-default-arguments.
- sendmail-progname
- [Obsolete] Predecessor of mta-argv0.
- sendwait
- Sending messages to the chosen mta or to
command-pipe receivers (see
On sending
mail, and non-interactive mode) will be performed asynchronously. This
means that only startup errors of the respective program will be
recognizable, but no delivery errors. Also, no guarantees can be made as
to when the respective program will actually run, as well as to when they
will have produced output.
If this variable is set then child program exit is waited for,
and its exit status code is used to decide about success. Remarks: in
conflict with the POSIX standard this variable is built-in to be
initially set. Another difference is that it can have a value, which is
interpreted as a comma-separated list of case-insensitive strings naming
specific subsystems for which synchronousness shall be ensured (only).
Possible values are ‘mta ’ for
mta delivery, and
‘pcc ’ for command-pipe
receivers.
- showlast
- (Boolean) This setting causes S-nail to start at the last message instead
of the first one when opening a mail folder, as well as with
from and headers .
- showname
- (Boolean) Causes S-nail to use the sender's real name instead of the plain
address in the header field summary and in message specifications.
- showto
- (Boolean) Causes the recipient of the message to be shown in the header
summary if the message was sent by the user.
- Sign
- The value backing
~A , one of the
COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see
message-inject-tail,
on-compose-leave and
on-compose-splice.
- sign
- The value backing
~a , one of the
COMMAND ESCAPES. Also see
message-inject-tail,
on-compose-leave and
on-compose-splice.
- signature
- [Obsolete] Please use on-compose-splice or
on-compose-splice-shell or
on-compose-leave and (if necessary)
message-inject-tail instead!
- skipemptybody
- (Boolean) If an outgoing message has an empty first or only message part,
do not send, but discard it, successfully (also see the command line
option
-E ).
- smime-ca-dir,
smime-ca-file
- [Option] Specify the location of trusted CA certificates in PEM (Privacy
Enhanced Mail) for the purpose of verification of S/MIME signed messages.
tls-ca-dir documents the necessary preparation steps
to use the former. The set of CA certificates which are built into the TLS
library can be explicitly turned off by setting
smime-ca-no-defaults, and further fine-tuning is
possible via smime-ca-flags.
- smime-ca-flags
- [Option] Can be used to fine-tune behaviour of the X509 CA certificate
storage, and the certificate verification that is used. The actual values
and their meanings are documented for
tls-ca-flags.
- smime-ca-no-defaults
- (Boolean)[Option] Do not load the default CA locations that are built into
the used to TLS library to verify S/MIME signed messages.
- smime-cipher-USER@HOST,
smime-cipher
- [Option] Specifies the cipher to use when generating S/MIME encrypted
messages (for the specified account). RFC 5751 mandates a default of
‘
aes128 ’ (AES-128 CBC). Possible
values are (case-insensitive and) in decreasing cipher strength:
‘aes256 ’ (AES-256 CBC),
‘aes192 ’ (AES-192 CBC),
‘aes128 ’ (AES-128 CBC),
‘des3 ’ (DES EDE3 CBC, 168 bits;
default if ‘aes128 ’ is not
available) and ‘des ’ (DES CBC, 56
bits).
The actually available cipher algorithms depend on the
cryptographic library that S-nail uses. [Option] Support for more cipher
algorithms may be available through dynamic loading via
EVP_get_cipherbyname(3)
(OpenSSL) if S-nail has been compiled to support this.
- smime-crl-dir
- [Option] Specifies a directory that contains files with CRLs in PEM format
to use when verifying S/MIME messages.
- smime-crl-file
- [Option] Specifies a file that contains a CRL in PEM format to use when
verifying S/MIME messages.
- smime-encrypt-USER@HOST
- [Option] If this variable is set, messages send to the given receiver are
encrypted before sending. The value of the variable must be set to the
name of a file that contains a certificate in PEM format.
If a message is sent to multiple recipients, each of them for
whom a corresponding variable is set will receive an individually
encrypted message; other recipients will continue to receive the message
in plain text unless the smime-force-encryption
variable is set. It is recommended to sign encrypted messages, i.e., to
also set the smime-sign variable.
content-description-smime-message will be
inspected for messages which become encrypted.
- smime-force-encryption
- (Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to refuse sending unencrypted
messages.
- smime-sign
- (Boolean)[Option] S/MIME sign outgoing messages with the user's
(from) private key and include the users certificate
as a MIME attachment. Signing a message enables a recipient to verify that
the sender used a valid certificate, that the email addresses in the
certificate match those in the message header and that the message content
has not been altered. It does not change the message text, and people will
be able to read the message as usual.
content-description-smime-signature will be
inspected. Also see smime-sign-cert,
smime-sign-include-certs and
smime-sign-digest.
- smime-sign-cert-USER@HOST,
smime-sign-cert
- [Option] Points to a file in PEM format. For the purpose of signing and
decryption this file needs to contain the user's private key, followed by
his certificate.
For message signing
‘USER@HOST ’ is always derived from
the value of from (or, if that contains multiple
addresses, sender). For the purpose of encryption
the recipients public encryption key (certificate) is expected; the
command certsave can be used to save
certificates of signed messages (the section
Signed
and encrypted messages with S/MIME gives some details). This mode of
operation is usually driven by the specialized form.
When decrypting messages the account is derived from the
recipient fields (‘To: ’ and
‘Cc: ’) of the message, which are
searched for addresses for which such a variable is set. S-nail always
uses the first address that matches, so if the same message is sent to
more than one of the user addresses using different encryption keys,
decryption might fail.
Password-encrypted keys may be used for signing and
decryption. Automated password lookup is possible via the
“pseudo-hosts”
‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-key ’ for the
private key, and
‘USER@HOST.smime-cert-cert ’ for
the certificate stored in the same file. For example, the hypothetical
address ‘bob@exam.ple ’ could be
driven with a private key / certificate pair path defined in
smime-sign-cert-bob@exam.ple, and the needed
passwords would then be looked up as
‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-key ’ and
‘bob@exam.ple.smime-cert-cert ’.
When decrypting the value of from will be tried as
a fallback to provide the necessary
‘USER@HOST ’. To include
intermediate certificates, use
smime-sign-include-certs. The possible password
sources are documented in
On URL syntax
and credential lookup.
- smime-sign-digest-USER@HOST,
smime-sign-digest
- [Option] Specifies the message digest to use when signing S/MIME messages.
Please remember that for this use case
‘
USER@HOST ’ refers to the variable
from (or, if that contains multiple addresses,
sender). The available algorithms depend on the used
cryptographic library, but at least one usable built-in algorithm is
ensured as a default. If possible the standard RFC 5751 will be violated
by using ‘SHA512 ’ instead of the
mandated ‘SHA1 ’ due to security
concerns. This variable is ignored for very old (released before 2010)
cryptographic libraries which do not offer the necessary interface: it
will be logged if that happened.
S-nail will try to add built-in support for the following
message digests, names are case-insensitive:
‘BLAKE2b512 ’,
‘BLAKE2s256 ’,
‘SHA3-512 ’,
‘SHA3-384 ’,
‘SHA3-256 ’,
‘SHA3-224 ’, as well as the widely
available ‘SHA512 ’,
‘SHA384 ’,
‘SHA256 ’,
‘SHA224 ’, and the proposed
insecure ‘SHA1 ’, finally
‘MD5 ’. More digests may
[Option]ally be available through dynamic loading via the OpenSSL
function
EVP_get_digestbyname(3).
- smime-sign-include-certs-USER@HOST,
smime-sign-include-certs
- [Option] If used, this is supposed to a consist of a comma-separated list
of files, each of which containing a single certificate in PEM format to
be included in the S/MIME message in addition to the
smime-sign-cert certificate. This can be used to
include intermediate certificates of the certificate authority, in order
to allow the receiver's S/MIME implementation to perform a verification of
the entire certificate chain, starting from a local root certificate, over
the intermediate certificates, down to the
smime-sign-cert. Even though top level certificates
may also be included in the chain, they will not be used for the
verification on the receiver's side.
For the purpose of the mechanisms involved here,
‘USER@HOST ’ refers to the content
of the internal variable from (or, if that
contains multiple addresses, sender). The
pseudo-host
‘USER@HOST.smime-include-certs ’
will be used for performing password lookups for these certificates,
shall they have been given one, therefore the lookup can be automated
via the mechanisms described in
On URL syntax
and credential lookup.
- smime-sign-message-digest-USER@HOST,
smime-sign-message-digest
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor(s) of
smime-sign-digest.
- smtp
- [Obsolete][Option] To use the built-in SMTP transport, specify a SMTP URL
in mta. [v15 behaviour may differ] For compatibility
reasons a set smtp is used in preference of
mta.
- smtp-auth-USER@HOST,
smtp-auth-HOST, smtp-auth
- [Option] Variable chain that controls the SMTP mta
authentication method, possible values are
‘
none ’ ([no v15-compat] default),
‘plain ’ ([v15-compat] default),
‘login ’, [v15-compat]
‘oauthbearer ’ (see
FAQ entry
But, how about
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?) as well as [v15-compat]
‘external ’ and
‘externanon ’ for TLS secured
connections which pass a client certificate via
tls-config-pairs. There may be the [Option]al
methods ‘cram-md5 ’ and
‘gssapi ’.
‘none ’ and
‘externanon ’ do not need any user
credentials, ‘external ’ and
‘gssapi ’ require a user name, and
all other methods require a user name and a
password.
‘externanon ’ solely builds upon the
credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the way to go
since tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422 aka RFC 4954, and
fail if additional credentials are passed. Also see
mta. Note that smtp-auth-HOST
is [v15-compat]. ([no v15-compat] Requires
smtp-auth-password and
smtp-auth-user. Note for
smtp-auth-USER@HOST: may override dependent on
sender address in the variable from.)
- smtp-auth-password
- [Option][no v15-compat] Sets the global fallback password for SMTP
authentication. If the authentication method requires a password, but
neither smtp-auth-password nor a matching
smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST can be found, S-nail
will ask for a password on the user's terminal.
- smtp-auth-password-USER@HOST
- [no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-password for
specific values of sender addresses, dependent upon the variable
from.
- smtp-auth-user
- [Option][no v15-compat] Sets the global fallback user name for SMTP
authentication. If the authentication method requires a user name, but
neither smtp-auth-user nor a matching
smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST can be found, S-nail will
ask for a user name on the user's terminal.
- smtp-auth-user-USER@HOST
- [no v15-compat] Overrides smtp-auth-user for
specific values of sender addresses, dependent upon the variable
from.
- smtp-hostname
- [Option][v15-compat] Normally S-nail uses the variable
from to derive the necessary
‘
USER@HOST ’ information in order to
issue a ‘MAIL FROM:<> ’ SMTP
mta command. Setting
smtp-hostname can be used to use the
‘USER ’ from the SMTP account
(mta or the user variable
chain) and the given ‘HOST ’
(hostname if the empty string is given, or the local
hostname as a last resort). This often allows using an address that is
itself valid but hosted by a provider other than from which (in
from) the message is sent. Setting this variable
also influences generated
‘Message-ID: ’ and
‘Content-ID: ’ header fields. If the
[Option]al IDNA support is available (see
idna-disable) variable assignment is aborted when a
necessary conversion fails.
- smtp-use-starttls-USER@HOST,
smtp-use-starttls-HOST,
smtp-use-starttls
- (Boolean)[Option] Causes S-nail to issue a
‘
STARTTLS ’ command to make an SMTP
mta session TLS encrypted, i.e., to enable transport
layer security.
- socket-connect-timeout
- [Option] A positive number that defines the timeout to wait for
establishing a socket connection before forcing
^ERR-TIMEDOUT.
- socks-proxy-USER@HOST,
socks-proxy-HOST,
socks-proxy
- [Option] If set to the URL of a SOCKS5 server then all network activities
are proxied through it, except for the single DNS name lookup necessary to
resolve the proxy URL (unnecessary when given an already resolved IP
address). It is automatically squared with the environment variable
SOCKS5_PROXY , changing the one will adjust the
other. This example creates a local SOCKS5 proxy on port 10000 that
forwards to the machine ‘HOST ’ (with
identity ‘USER ’), and from which
actual network traffic happens:
$ ssh -D 10000 USER@HOST
$ s-nail -Ssocks-proxy=[socks5://]localhost:10000
# or =localhost:10000; no local DNS: =127.0.0.1:10000
- spam-interface
- [Option] In order to use any of the spam-related commands (like
spamrate ) the desired spam interface must be
defined by setting this variable. Please refer to the manual section
Handling spam for the complete
picture of spam handling in S-nail. All or none of the following
interfaces may be available:
- ‘
spamc ’
- Interaction with
spamc(1)
from the
spamassassin(1)
(SpamAssassin)
suite. Different to the generic filter interface S-nail will
automatically add the correct arguments for a given command and has
the necessary knowledge to parse the program's output. A default value
for spamc-command will have been compiled into
the S-nail binary if
spamc(1)
has been found in
PATH during compilation.
Shall it be necessary to define a specific connection type (rather
than using a configuration file for that), the variable
spamc-arguments can be used as in for example
‘-d server.example.com -p 783 ’.
It is also possible to specify a per-user configuration via
spamc-user. Note that this interface does not
inspect the ‘is-spam ’ flag of a
message for the command spamforget .
- ‘
filter ’
- generic spam filter support via freely configurable hooks. This
interface is meant for programs like
bogofilter(1)
and requires according behaviour in respect to the hooks' exit status
for at least the command
spamrate
(‘0 ’ meaning a message is spam,
‘1 ’ for non-spam,
‘2 ’ for unsure and any other
return value indicating a hard error); since the hooks can include
shell code snippets diverting behaviour can be intercepted as
necessary. The hooks are spamfilter-ham,
spamfilter-noham,
spamfilter-nospam,
spamfilter-rate and
spamfilter-spam; the manual section
Handling spam contains
examples for some programs. The process environment of the hooks will
have the variable MAILX_FILENAME_GENERATED
set. Note that spam score support for spamrate
is not supported unless the [Option]tional regular expression support
is available and the spamfilter-rate-scanscore
variable is set.
- spam-maxsize
- [Option] Messages that exceed this size will not be passed through to the
configured spam-interface. If unset or 0, the
default of 420000 bytes is used.
- spamc-command
- [Option] The path to the
spamc(1)
program for the ‘
spamc ’
spam-interface. Note that the path is not expanded,
but used “as is”. A fallback path will have been compiled
into the S-nail binary if the executable had been found during
compilation.
- spamc-arguments
- [Option] Even though S-nail deals with most arguments for the
‘
spamc ’
spam-interface automatically, it may at least
sometimes be desirable to specify connection-related ones via this
variable, for example ‘-d server.example.com -p
783 ’.
- spamc-user
- [Option] Specify a username for per-user configuration files for the
‘
spamc ’
spam-interface. If this is set to the empty string
then S-nail will use the name of the current
user.
- spamfilter-ham,
spamfilter-noham,
spamfilter-nospam,
spamfilter-rate,
spamfilter-spam
- [Option] Command and argument hooks for the
‘
filter ’
spam-interface. The manual section
Handling spam contains examples
for some programs.
- spamfilter-rate-scanscore
- [Option] Because of the generic nature of the
‘
filter ’
spam-interface spam scores are not supported for it
by default, but if the [Option]nal regular expression support is available
then setting this variable can be used to overcome this restriction. It is
interpreted as follows: first a number (digits) is parsed that must be
followed by a semicolon ‘; ’ and an
extended regular expression. Then the latter is used to parse the first
output line of the spamfilter-rate hook, and, in
case the evaluation is successful, the group that has been specified via
the number is interpreted as a floating point scan score.
- ssl-ca-dir-USER@HOST,
ssl-ca-dir-HOST, ssl-ca-dir,
ssl-ca-file-USER@HOST,
ssl-ca-file-HOST,
ssl-ca-file
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-ca-file,
tls-ca-dir.
- ssl-ca-flags-USER@HOST,
ssl-ca-flags-HOST,
ssl-ca-flags
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-ca-flags.
- ssl-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST,
ssl-ca-no-defaults-HOST,
ssl-ca-no-defaults
- [Obsolete](Boolean)[Option] Predecessor of
tls-ca-no-defaults.
- ssl-cert-USER@HOST,
ssl-cert-HOST, ssl-cert
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
Certificate slot
of tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-cipher-list-USER@HOST,
ssl-cipher-list-HOST,
ssl-cipher-list
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
CipherString
slot of tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-config-file
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of
tls-config-file.
- ssl-config-module-USER@HOST,
ssl-config-module-HOST,
ssl-config-module
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of
tls-config-module.
- ssl-config-pairs-USER@HOST,
ssl-config-pairs-HOST,
ssl-config-pairs
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of
tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-crl-dir, ssl-crl-file
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessors of tls-crl-dir,
tls-crl-file.
- ssl-curves-USER@HOST,
ssl-curves-HOST, ssl-curves
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
Curves slot of
tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-features
- [Obsolete][Option](Read-only) Predecessor of
tls-features.
- ssl-key-USER@HOST,
ssl-key-HOST, ssl-key
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
PrivateKey slot
of tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-method-USER@HOST,
ssl-method-HOST, ssl-method
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
Protocol slot of
tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-protocol-USER@HOST,
ssl-protocol-HOST,
ssl-protocol
- [Obsolete][Option] Please use the
Protocol slot of
tls-config-pairs.
- ssl-rand-file
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of
tls-rand-file.
- ssl-verify-USER@HOST,
ssl-verify-HOST, ssl-verify
- [Obsolete][Option] Predecessor of tls-verify.
- stealthmua
- If only set without an assigned value, then this setting inhibits the
generation of the ‘
Message-ID: ’,
‘Content-ID: ’ and
‘User-Agent: ’ header fields that
include obvious references to S-nail. There are two pitfalls associated
with this: First, the message id of outgoing messages is not known
anymore. Second, an expert may still use the remaining information in the
header to track down the originating mail user agent. If set to the value
‘noagent ’, then the mentioned
‘Message-ID: ’ and
‘Content-ID: ’ suppression does not
occur.
- system-mailrc
- (Read-only) The compiled in path of the system wide initialization file
one of the Resource files:
s-nail.rc.
- termcap
- ([Option]) This specifies a comma-separated list of
Terminal Information Library (libterminfo,
-lterminfo) and/or Termcap Access Library
(libtermcap, -ltermcap) capabilities (see
On terminal
control and line editor, escape commas with reverse solidus
‘
\ ’) to be used to overwrite or
define entries. Note this variable will only be queried
once at program startup and can thus only be specified in resource files
or on the command line. It will always be inspected, regardless of whether
features denotes termcap/terminfo library support
via ‘,+termcap, ’.
String capabilities form
‘cap=value ’ pairs and are expected
unless noted otherwise. Numerics have to be notated as
‘cap#number ’ where the number is
expected in normal decimal notation. Finally, booleans do not have any
value but indicate a true or false state simply by being defined or not;
this indeed means that S-nail does not support undefining an existing
boolean. String capability values will undergo some expansions before
use: for one notations like
‘^LETTER ’ stand for
‘control-LETTER ’, and for
clarification purposes ‘\E ’ can be
used to specify ‘escape ’ (the
control notation ‘^[ ’ could lead
to misreadings when a left bracket follows, which it does for the
standard CSI sequence); finally three letter octal sequences, as in
‘\061 ’, are supported. To specify
that a terminal supports 256-colours, and to define sequences that home
the cursor and produce an audible bell, one might write:
? set termcap='Co#256,home=\E[H,bel=^G'
The following terminal capabilities are or may be meaningful
for the operation of the built-in line editor or S-nail in general:
am
auto_right_margin : boolean which indicates if
the right margin needs special treatment; the
xenl capability is related, for more see
COLUMNS . This capability is only used when
backed by library support.
clear or
cl
clear_screen : clear the screen and home
cursor. (Will be simulated via ho plus
cd .)
colors or
Co
max_colors : numeric capability specifying the
maximum number of colours. Note that S-nail does not actually care
about the terminal beside that, but always emits ANSI / ISO 6429
escape sequences; also see colour .
cr
carriage_return : move to the first column in
the current row. The default built-in fallback is
‘\r ’.
cub1 or le
cursor_left : move the cursor left one space
(non-destructively). The default built-in fallback is
‘\b ’.
cuf1 or nd
cursor_right : move the cursor right one space
(non-destructively). The default built-in fallback is
‘\E[C ’, which is used by most
terminals. Less often occur
‘\EC ’ and
‘\EOC ’.
ed or cd
clr_eos : clear the screen.
el or ce
clr_eol : clear to the end of line. (Will be
simulated via ch plus repetitions of space
characters.)
home or ho
cursor_home : home cursor.
hpa or ch
column_address : move the cursor (to the given
column parameter) in the current row. (Will be simulated via
cr plus nd .)
rmcup or
te /
smcup or ti
exit_ca_mode and
enter_ca_mode , respectively: exit and enter
the alternative screen ca-mode, effectively turning S-nail into a
fullscreen application. This must be enabled explicitly by setting
termcap-ca-mode.
smkx or
ks /
rmkx or ke
keypad_xmit and
keypad_local , respectively: enable and disable
the keypad. This is always enabled if available, because it seems even
keyboards without keypads generate other key codes for, e.g., cursor
keys in that case, and only if enabled we see the codes that we are
interested in.
xenl or xn
eat_newline_glitch : boolean which indicates
whether a newline written in the last column of an
auto_right_margin indicating terminal is
ignored. With it the full terminal width is available even on autowrap
terminals. This will be inspected even without
‘,+termcap, ’
features.
Many more capabilities which describe key-sequences are
documented for bind .
- termcap-ca-mode
- [Option] Allow usage of the
exit_ca_mode and
enter_ca_mode
termcapabilities in order to enter an alternative
exclusive screen, the so-called ca-mode; this usually requires special
configuration of the PAGER , also dependent on the
value of crt. Note this variable
will only be queried once at program startup and can thus only be
specified in resource files or on the command line.
- termcap-disable
- [Option] Disable any interaction with a terminal control library. If set
only some generic fallback built-ins and possibly the content of
termcap describe the terminal to S-nail.
Note this variable will only be queried once at program
startup and can thus only be specified in resource files or on the command
line.
- tls-ca-dir-USER@HOST,
tls-ca-dir-HOST, tls-ca-dir,
tls-ca-file-USER@HOST,
tls-ca-file-HOST,
tls-ca-file
- [Option] Directory and file, respectively, for pools of trusted CA
certificates in PEM (Privacy Enhanced Mail) format, for the purpose of
verification of TLS server certificates. Concurrent use is possible, the
file is loaded once needed first, the directory lookup is performed anew
as a last resort whenever necessary. The CA certificate pool built into
the TLS library can be disabled via
tls-ca-no-defaults, further fine-tuning is possible
via tls-ca-flags. The directory search requires
special filename conventions, please see
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)
and
verify(1)
(or
c_rehash(1)).
- tls-ca-flags-USER@HOST,
tls-ca-flags-HOST,
tls-ca-flags
- [Option] Can be used to fine-tune behaviour of the X509 CA certificate
storage, and the certificate verification that is used (also see
tls-verify). The value is expected to consist of a
comma-separated list of configuration directives, with any intervening
whitespace being ignored. The directives directly map to flags that can be
passed to
X509_STORE_set_flags(3),
which are usually defined in a file
openssl/x509_vfy.h, and the availability of which
depends on the used TLS library version: a directive without mapping is
ignored (error log subject to debug). Directives
currently understood (case-insensitively) include:
no-alt-chains
- If the initial chain is not trusted, do not attempt to build an
alternative chain. Setting this flag will make OpenSSL certificate
verification match that of older OpenSSL versions, before automatic
building and checking of alternative chains has been implemented; also
see
trusted-first .
no-check-time
- Do not check certificate/CRL validity against current time.
partial-chain
- By default partial, incomplete chains which cannot be verified up to
the chain top, a self-signed root certificate, will not verify. With
this flag set, a chain succeeds to verify if at least one signing
certificate of the chain is in any of the configured trusted stores of
CA certificates. The OpenSSL manual page
SSL_CTX_load_verify_locations(3)
gives some advise how to manage your own trusted store of CA
certificates.
strict
- Disable workarounds for broken certificates.
trusted-first
- Try building a chain using issuers in the trusted store first to avoid
problems with server-sent legacy intermediate certificates. Newer
versions of OpenSSL support alternative chain checking and enable it
by default, resulting in the same behaviour; also see
no-alt-chains .
- tls-ca-no-defaults-USER@HOST,
tls-ca-no-defaults-HOST,
tls-ca-no-defaults
- (Boolean)[Option] Do not load the default CA locations that are built into
the used to TLS library to verify TLS server certificates.
- tls-config-file
- [Option] If this variable is set
CONF_modules_load_file(3)
(if announced via
‘
,+modules-load-file, ’ in
tls-features) is used to allow resource file based
configuration of the TLS library. This happens once the library is used
first, which may also be early during startup (logged with
verbose)! If a non-empty value is given then the
given file, after performing
Filename
transformations, will be used instead of the TLS libraries global
default, and it is an error if the file cannot be loaded. The application
name will always be passed as
‘s-nail ’. Some TLS libraries support
application-specific configuration via resource files loaded like this,
please see tls-config-module.
- tls-config-module-USER@HOST,
tls-config-module-HOST,
tls-config-module
- [Option] If file based application-specific configuration via
tls-config-file is available, announced as
‘
,+ctx-config, ’ by
tls-features, indicating availability of
SSL_CTX_config(3),
then, it becomes possible to use a central TLS configuration file for all
programs, including s-nail, for example
# Register a configuration section for s-nail
s-nail = mailx_master
# The top configuration section creates a relation
# in between dynamic SSL configuration and an actual
# program specific configuration section
[mailx_master]
ssl_conf = mailx_tls_config
# And that program specific configuration section now
# can map diverse tls-config-module names to sections,
# as in: tls-config-module=account_xy
[mailx_tls_config]
account_xy = mailx_account_xy
account_yz = mailx_account_yz
[mailx_account_xy]
MinProtocol = TLSv1.2
Curves=P-521
[mailx_account_yz]
CipherString = TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:
MinProtocol = TLSv1.1
Options = Bugs
- tls-config-pairs-USER@HOST,
tls-config-pairs-HOST,
tls-config-pairs
- [Option] The value of this variable chain will be interpreted as a
comma-separated list of directive/value pairs. Directives and values need
to be separated by equals signs ‘
= ’,
any whitespace surrounding pair members is removed. Keys are (usually)
case-insensitive. Different to when placing these pairs in a
tls-config-module section of a
tls-config-file, commas
‘, ’ need to be escaped with a
reverse solidus ‘\ ’ when included in
pairs; also different: if the equals sign
‘= ’ is preceded with an asterisk
‘* ’
Filename
transformations will be performed on the value; it is an error if
these fail. Unless proper support is announced by
tls-features
(‘,+conf-ctx, ’) only the keys below
are supported, otherwise the pairs will be used directly as arguments to
the function
SSL_CONF_cmd(3).
Certificate
- Filename of a TLS client certificate (chain) required by some servers.
Fallback support via
SSL_CTX_use_certificate_chain_file(3).
Filename
transformations are performed.
PrivateKey
will be set to the same value if not initialized explicitly. Some
services support so-called
‘external ’ authentication if a
TLS client certificate was successfully presented during connection
establishment (“connecting is authenticating”).
CipherString
- A list of ciphers for TLS connections, see
ciphers(1).
By default no list of ciphers is set, resulting in a
Protocol -specific list of ciphers (the
protocol standards define lists of acceptable ciphers; possibly
cramped by the used TLS library). Fallback support via
SSL_CTX_set_cipher_list(3).
Ciphersuites
- A list of ciphers used for TLSv1.3 connections, see
ciphers(1).
These will be joined onto the list of ciphers from
CipherString . Available if
tls-features announces
‘,+ctx-set-ciphersuites, ’, as
necessary via
SSL_CTX_set_ciphersuites(3).
Curves
- A list of supported elliptic curves, if applicable. By default no
curves are set. Fallback support via
SSL_CTX_set1_curves_list(3),
if available.
MaxProtocol ,
MinProtocol
- The maximum and minimum supported TLS versions, respectively.
Available if tls-features announces
‘
,+ctx-set-maxmin-proto, ’, as
necessary via
SSL_CTX_set_max_proto_version(3)
and
SSL_CTX_set_min_proto_version(3);
these fallbacks use an internal parser which understands the strings
‘SSLv3 ’,
‘TLSv1 ’,
‘TLSv1.1 ’,
‘TLSv1.2 ’,
‘TLSv1.3 ’, and the special value
‘None ’, which disables the given
limit.
Options
- Various flags to set. Fallback via
SSL_CTX_set_options(3),
in which case any other value but (exactly)
‘
Bugs ’ results in an error.
PrivateKey
- Filename of the private key in PEM format of a TLS client certificate.
If unset, the value of
Certificate is used.
Filename
transformations are performed. Fallback via
SSL_CTX_use_PrivateKey_file(3).
Protocol
- The used TLS protocol. If tls-features announces
‘
,+conf-ctx, ’ or
‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto ’ then
using MaxProtocol and
MinProtocol is preferable. Fallback is
SSL_CTX_set_options(3),
driven via an internal parser which understands the strings
‘SSLv3 ’,
‘TLSv1 ’,
‘TLSv1.1 ’,
‘TLSv1.2 ’,
‘TLSv1.3 ’, and the special value
‘ALL ’. Multiple protocols may be
given as a comma-separated list, any whitespace is ignored, an
optional plus sign ‘+ ’ prefix
enables, a hyphen-minus ‘- ’
prefix disables a protocol, so that ‘-ALL,
TLSv1.2 ’ enables only the TLSv1.2 protocol.
- tls-crl-dir, tls-crl-file
- [Option] Specify a directory / a file, respectively, that contains a CRL
in PEM format to use when verifying TLS server certificates.
- tls-features
- [Option](Read-only) This expands to a comma-separated list of the TLS
library identity and optional features. To ease substring matching the
string starts and ends with a comma. Currently supported identities are
‘
libressl ’ (LibreSSL) ,
‘libssl-0x30000 ’ (OpenSSL v3.0.0
series), ‘libssl-0x10100 ’ (OpenSSL
v1.1.x series) and ‘libssl-0x10000 ’
(elder OpenSSL series, other clones). Optional features are preceded with
a plus sign ‘+ ’ when available, and
with a hyphen-minus ‘- ’ otherwise.
Currently known features are
‘conf-ctx ’
(tls-config-pairs),
‘ctx-config ’
(tls-config-module),
‘ctx-set-ciphersuites ’
(Ciphersuites slot of
tls-config-pairs),
‘ctx-set-maxmin-proto ’
(tls-config-pairs),
‘modules-load-file ’
(tls-config-file), and
‘tls-rand-file ’
(tls-rand-file).
- tls-fingerprint-USER@HOST,
tls-fingerprint-HOST,
tls-fingerprint
- [Option] It is possible to replace the verification of the connection peer
certificate against the entire local pool of CAs (for more see
Encrypted network
communication) with the comparison against a precalculated certificate
message digest, the so-called fingerprint, to be specified as the used
tls-fingerprint-digest. This fingerprint can for
example be calculated with
‘
tls fingerprint
HOST ’.
- tls-fingerprint-digest-USER@HOST,
tls-fingerprint-digest-HOST,
tls-fingerprint-digest
- [Option] The message digest to be used when creating TLS certificate
fingerprints, the defaults, if available, in test order, being
‘
BLAKE2s256 ’,
‘SHA256 ’. For the complete list of
digest algorithms refer to smime-sign-digest.
- tls-rand-file
- [Option] If tls-features announces
‘
,+tls-rand-file, ’ then this will be
queried to find a file with random entropy data which can be used to seed
the P(seudo)R(andom)N(umber)G(enerator), see
RAND_load_file(3).
The default filename
(RAND_file_name(3),
normally ~/.rnd) will be used if this variable is
not set or empty, or if the
Filename
transformations fail. Shall seeding the PRNG have been successful,
RAND_write_file(3)
will be called to update the entropy. Remarks: libraries which do not
announce this feature seed the PRNG by other means.
- tls-verify-USER@HOST,
tls-verify-HOST, tls-verify
- [Option] Variable chain that sets the action to be performed if an error
occurs during TLS server certificate validation against the specified or
default trust stores tls-ca-dir,
tls-ca-file, or the TLS library built-in defaults
(unless usage disallowed via tls-ca-no-defaults),
and as fine-tuned via tls-ca-flags. Valid
(case-insensitive) values are
‘
strict ’ (fail and close connection
immediately), ‘ask ’ (ask whether to
continue on standard input), ‘warn ’
(show a warning and continue),
‘ignore ’ (do not perform
validation). The default is
‘ask ’.
- toplines
- If defined, gives the number of lines of a message to be displayed with
the command
top ; if unset, the first five lines
are printed, if set to 0 the variable screen is
inspected. If the value is negative then its absolute value will be used
for unsigned right shifting (see vexpr ) the
screen height.
- topsqueeze
- (Boolean) If set then the
top command series will
strip adjacent empty lines and quotations.
- ttycharset
- The character set of the terminal S-nail operates on, and the one and only
supported character set that S-nail can use if no character set conversion
capabilities have been compiled into it, in which case it defaults to
ISO-8859-1. Otherwise it defaults to UTF-8. Sufficient locale support
provided the default will be preferably deduced from the locale
environment if that is set (for example
LC_CTYPE ,
see there for more); runtime locale changes will be reflected by
ttycharset except during the program startup phase
and if -S had been used to freeze the given value.
Refer to the section Character
sets for the complete picture about character sets.
- typescript-mode
- (Boolean) A special multiplex variable that disables all variables and
settings which result in behaviour that interferes with running S-nail in
script(1);
it sets colour-disable,
line-editor-disable and (before startup completed
only) termcap-disable. Unsetting it does not restore
the former state of the covered settings.
- umask
- For a safe-by-default policy the process file mode creation mask
umask(2)
will be set to ‘
0077 ’ on program
startup after the resource files have been loaded, and unless this
variable is set. By assigning this an empty value the active setting will
not be changed, otherwise the given value will be made the new file mode
creation mask. Child processes inherit the file mode creation mask of
their parent.
- user-HOST, user
- [v15-compat] Variable chain that sets a global fallback user name, used in
case none has been given in the protocol and account-specific URL. This
variable defaults to the name of the user who runs S-nail.
- v15-compat
- Enable upward compatibility with S-nail version 15.0 in respect to which
configuration options are available and how they are handled. If set to a
non-empty value the command modifier
wysh is
implied and thus enforces
Shell-style argument
quoting over
Old-style argument
quoting for all commands which support both. This manual uses
[v15-compat] and [no v15-compat] to refer to the new and the old way of
doing things, respectively.
- verbose
- Verbose mode enables logging of informational context messages.
Historically a (Boolean) variable, this can either be set multiple times
(what the command line option
-v uses), or be
assigned a numeric value in order to increase verbosity. Assigning the
value 0 disables verbosity and thus (almost) equals
unset . The maximum number is 3. Also see
debug.
- version, version-date,
version-hexnum, version-major,
version-minor,
version-update
- (Read-only) S-nail version information: the first variable is a string
with the complete version identification, the second the release date in
ISO 8601 notation without time. The third is a 32-bit hexadecimal number
with the upper 8 bits storing the major, followed by the minor and update
version numbers which occupy 12 bits each. The latter three variables
contain only decimal digits: the major, minor and update version numbers.
The output of the command
version will include
this information.
- writebackedited
- If this variable is set messages modified using the
edit or visual commands
are written back to the current folder when it is quit; it is only
honoured for writable folders in MBOX format, though. Note that the editor
will be pointed to the raw message content in that case, i.e., neither
MIME decoding nor decryption will have been performed, and proper
mbox-rfc4155
‘From_ ’ quoting of newly added or
edited content is also left as an exercise to the user.
The term “environment variable” should be considered an indication
that these variables are either standardized as vivid parts of process
environments, or that they are commonly found in there. The process
environment is inherited from the
sh(1) once
S-nail is started, and unless otherwise explicitly noted handling of the
following variables transparently integrates into that of the
INTERNAL VARIABLES from S-nail's
point of view. This means they can be managed via set
and unset , causing automatic program environment
updates (to be inherited by newly created child processes).
In order to integrate other environment variables equally they
need to be imported (linked) with the command
environ . This command can also be used to set and
unset non-integrated environment variables from scratch, sufficient system
support provided. The following example, applicable to a POSIX shell, sets
the COLUMNS environment variable for S-nail only,
and beforehand exports the EDITOR in order to affect
any further processing in the running shell:
$ EDITOR="vim -u ${HOME}/.vimrc"
$ export EDITOR
$ COLUMNS=80 s-nail -R
COLUMNS
- The user's preferred width in column positions for the terminal screen.
Queried and used once on program startup in interactive or batch
(
-# ) mode, actively managed for child processes
and the MLE (see
On terminal
control and line editor) in interactive mode thereafter.
Non-interactive mode always uses, and the fallback default is a
compile-time constant, by default 80 columns. If in batch mode
COLUMNS and LINES are both
set but not both are usable (empty, not a number, or 0) at program
startup, then the real terminal screen size will be (tried to be)
determined once. (Normally the
sh(1)
manages these variables, and unsets them for pipe specifications
etc.)
DEAD
- The name of the (mailbox)
folder to use for saving
aborted messages if save is set; this defaults to
~/dead.letter. If the variable
debug is set no output will be generated, otherwise
the contents of the file will be replaced. Except shell globs
Filename
transformations (also see folder ) will be
performed.
EDITOR
- Pathname of the text editor to use for the
edit
command and ~e
(see COMMAND ESCAPES);
VISUAL is used for a more display oriented
editor.
HOME
- The user's home directory. This variable is only used when it resides in
the process environment. The calling user's home directory will be used
instead if this directory does not exist, is not accessible or cannot be
read; it will always be used for the root user. (No test for being
writable is performed to allow usage by non-privileged users within
read-only jails, but dependent on settings this directory is a default
write target for, for example,
DEAD ,
MBOX and more.)
LC_ALL ,
LC_CTYPE , LANG
- [Option] The (names in lookup order of the)
locale(7)
(and / or see
setlocale(3))
which indicates the used Character
sets. Runtime changes trigger automatic updates of the entire locale
system, which includes updating ttycharset (except
during startup if the variable has been frozen via
-S ).
LINES
- The user's preferred number of lines for the terminal screen. The
behaviour is as described for
COLUMNS , yet the
compile-time constant used in non-interactive mode and as a fallback
defaults to 24 (lines).
LISTER
- Pathname of the directory lister to use in the
folders command when operating on local mailboxes.
Default is
ls(1)
(path search through SHELL ).
LOGNAME
- Upon startup S-nail will actively ensure that this variable refers to the
name of the user who runs S-nail, in order to be able to pass a verified
name to any newly created child process.
MAIL
- Is used as the user's primary
system mailbox unless inbox is set. If the
environmental fallback is also not set, a built-in compile-time default is
used. This is assumed to be an absolute pathname.
MAILCAPS
- [Option] Override the default path search of
The Mailcap files: any
existing file therein will be loaded in sequence, appending any content to
the list of MIME type handler directives. The RFC 1524 standard imposed
default value is assigned otherwise:
‘
~/.mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap ’.
(The default value is a compile-time [Option].)
MAILRC
- Is used as a startup file instead of ~/.mailrc if
set. In order to avoid side-effects from configuration files scripts
should either set this variable to /dev/null or
the
-: command line option should be used.
MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC
- If this variable is set then reading of s-nail.rc
(aka system-mailrc) at startup is inhibited, i.e.,
the same effect is achieved as if S-nail had been started up with the
option
-: (and according argument) or
-n . This variable is only used when it resides in
the process environment.
MBOX
- The name of the user's secondary
mailbox file. A logical subset of the special
Filename
transformations (also see
folder ) are
supported. The default is ~/mbox. Traditionally
this MBOX is used as the file to save messages from the
primary system mailbox
that have been read. Also see Message
states.
NETRC
- [v15-compat][Option] This variable overrides the default location of the
user's ~/.netrc file.
- Pathname of the program to use for backing the command
more , and when the crt
variable enforces usage of a pager for output. The default paginator is
more(1)
(path search through SHELL ).
S-nail inspects the contents of this variable: if its contains
the string “less” then a non-existing environment variable
LESS will be set to (the portable)
‘RI ’, likewise for
“lv” LV will optionally be set to
‘-c ’. Also see
colour-pager.
PATH
- A colon-separated list of directories that is searched by the shell when
looking for commands, for example
‘
/bin:/usr/bin:/usr/local/bin ’.
POSIXLY_CORRECT
- This environment entry is automatically squared with
posix.
SHELL
- The shell to use for the commands
! ,
shell , the ~!
COMMAND ESCAPES and when
starting subprocesses. A default shell is used if this environment
variable is not defined.
SOCKS5_PROXY
- This environment entry is automatically squared with
socks-proxy.
SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH
- Specifies a time in seconds since the Unix epoch (1970-01-01) to be used
in place of the current time. This variable is looked up upon program
startup, and its existence will switch S-nail to a reproducible mode
(https://reproducible-builds.org)
which uses deterministic random numbers, a special fixated pseudo
LOGNAME and more. This operation mode is used for
development and by software packagers. [v15 behaviour may differ]
Currently an invalid setting is only ignored, rather than causing a
program abortion.
$ SOURCE_DATE_EPOCH=`date +%s`
s-nail
TERM
- [Option] The terminal type for which output is to be prepared. For
extended colour and font control please refer to
Coloured display, and for
terminal management in general to
On terminal
control and line editor.
TMPDIR
- Except for the root user this variable defines the directory for temporary
files to be used instead of /tmp (or the given
compile-time constant) if set, existent, accessible as well as read- and
writable. This variable is only used when it resides in the process
environment, but S-nail will ensure at startup that this environment
variable is updated to contain a usable temporary directory.
USER
- Identical to
LOGNAME (see there), but this
variable is not standardized, should therefore not be used, and is only
corrected if already set.
VISUAL
- Pathname of the text editor to use for the
visual
command and ~v
(see COMMAND ESCAPES);
EDITOR is used for a less display oriented
editor.
- ~/.mailcap,
/etc/mailcap
- [Option] Personal and system-wide MIME type handler definition files, see
The Mailcap files. (The shown
names are part of the RFC 1524 standard search path
MAILCAPS .)
- ~/.mailrc, s-nail.rc
- User-specific and system-wide files giving initial commands, the
Resource files. (The used
filenames come from MAILRC and
system-mailrc, respectively.)
- ~/mbox
- The default value for
MBOX .
- ~/.mime.types,
/usr/local/etc/mime.types
- Personal and system-wide MIME types, see
The mime.types files.
- ~/.netrc
- [v15-compat][Option] The default location of the user's
.netrc file – the section
The .netrc file documents the
file format. The used path can be set via
NETRC .
- /dev/null
- The data sink
null(4).
- ~/.rnd
- [Option] Possible location for persistent random entropy seed storage, see
tls-rand-file.
Upon startup S-nail reads in several resource files, in order:
- s-nail.rc
- System wide initialization file (system-mailrc).
Reading of this file can be suppressed, either by using the
-: (and according argument) or
-n command line options, or by setting the
ENVIRONMENT variable
MAILX_NO_SYSTEM_RC .
- ~/.mailrc
- File giving initial commands. A different file can be chosen by setting
the ENVIRONMENT variable
MAILRC . Reading of this file can be suppressed
with the -: command line option.
- mailx-extra-rc
- Defines a startup file to be read after all other resource files. It can
be used to specify settings that are not understood by other
mailx(1)
implementations, for example.
The content of these files is interpreted as follows:
- The whitespace characters space, tabulator and newline, as well as those
defined by the variable ifs, are removed from the
beginning and end of input lines.
- Empty lines are ignored.
- Any other line is interpreted as a command. It may be spread over multiple
input lines if the newline character is “escaped” by placing
a reverse solidus character ‘
\ ’ as
the last character of the line; whereas any leading whitespace of follow
lines is ignored, trailing whitespace before a escaped newline remains in
the input.
- If the line (content) starts with the number sign
‘
# ’ then it is a comment-command and
also ignored. (The comment-command is a real command, which does nothing,
and therefore the usual follow lines mechanism applies!)
Errors while loading these files are subject to the settings of
errexit and posix. More files
with syntactically equal content can be source ed.
The following, saved in a file, would be an examplary content:
# This line is a comment command. And y\
es, it is really continued here.
set debug \
verbose
set editheaders
As stated in HTML mail and
MIME attachments S-nail needs to learn about MIME (Multipurpose Internet
Mail Extensions) media types in order to classify message and attachment
content. One source for them are mime.types files, the
loading of which can be controlled by setting the variable
mimetypes-load-control. Another is the command
mimetype , which also offers access to S-nails MIME
type cache. mime.types files have the following
syntax:
type/subtype extension [extension ...]
# For example text/html html htm
where ‘type/subtype ’ define
the MIME media type, as standardized in RFC 2046:
‘type ’ is used to declare the general
type of data, while the ‘subtype ’
specifies a specific format for that type of data. One or multiple filename
‘extension ’s, separated by whitespace,
can be bound to the media type format. Comments may be introduced anywhere
on a line with a number sign ‘# ’,
causing the remaining line to be discarded. S-nail also supports an
extended, non-portable syntax in especially crafted files, which can be
loaded via the alternative value syntax of
mimetypes-load-control, and prepends an optional
‘type-marker ’:
[type-marker ]type/subtype extension
[extension ...]
The following type markers are supported:
- ?
- Treat message parts with this content as plain text.
- ?t
- The same as plain ?.
- ?h
- Treat message parts with this content as HTML tagsoup. If the [Option]al
HTML-tagsoup-to-text converter is not available treat the content as plain
text instead.
- ?H
- Likewise ?h, but instead of falling back to plain
text require an explicit content handler to be defined.
- ?q
- If no handler can be found a text message is displayed which says so. This
can be annoying, for example signatures serve a contextual purpose, their
content is of no use by itself. This marker will avoid displaying the text
message.
Further reading: for sending messages:
mimetype ,
mime-allow-text-controls,
mimetypes-load-control. For reading etc. messages:
HTML mail and MIME
attachments, The Mailcap
files, mimetype ,
mime-counter-evidence,
mimetypes-load-control,
pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE,
pipe-EXTENSION.
[Option] RFC 1524 defines a “User Agent Configuration Mechanism”
to be used to inform mail user agent programs about the locally installed
facilities for handling various data formats, i.e., about commands and how
they can be used to display, edit et cetera MIME part contents, as well as a
default path search that includes multiple possible locations of resource
files, and the MAILCAPS environment variable to
overwrite that. Handlers found from doing the path search will be cached, the
command mailcap operates on that cache, and the
variable mailcap-disable will suppress automatic
loading, and usage of any mailcap handlers.
HTML mail and MIME
attachments gives a general overview of how MIME types are handled.
“Mailcap” files consist of a set of newline
separated entries. Comment lines start with a number sign
‘# ’ (in the first column!) and are
ignored. Empty lines are ignored. All other lines are interpreted as mailcap
entries. An entry definition may be split over multiple lines by placing the
reverse solidus character ‘\ ’ last in
all but the final line. The standard does not specify how leading whitespace
of successive lines is to be treated, therefore they are retained.
“Mailcap” entries consist of a number of semicolon
‘; ’ separated fields. The first two
fields are mandatory and must occur in the specified order, the remaining
fields are optional and may appear in any order. Leading and trailing
whitespace of field content is ignored (removed). The reverse solidus
‘\ ’ character can be used to escape
any following character including semicolon and itself in the content of the
second field, and in value parts of any optional key/value field.
The first field defines the MIME
‘TYPE/SUBTYPE ’ the entry is about to
handle (case-insensitively). If the subtype is specified as an asterisk
‘* ’ the entry is meant to match all
subtypes of the named type, e.g.,
‘audio/* ’ would match any audio type.
The second field is the view shell command used to
display MIME parts of the given type.
Data consuming shell commands will be fed message (MIME part) data
on standard input unless one or more instances of the (unquoted) string
‘%s ’ are used: these formats will be
replaced with a temporary file(name) that has been prefilled with the parts
data. Data producing shell commands are expected to generata data on their
standard output unless that format is used. In all cases any given
‘%s ’ format is replaced with a
properly shell quoted filename. When a command requests a temporary file via
‘%s ’ then that will be removed again,
as if the x-mailx-tmpfile and
x-mailx-tmpfile-fill flags had been set; unless the
command requests x-mailx-async the
x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink flag is also implied; see
below for more.
Optional fields define single-word flags (case-insensitive), or
key / value pairs consisting of a case-insensitive keyword, an equals sign
‘= ’, and a shell command; whitespace
surrounding the equals sign is removed. Optional fields include the
following:
compose
- A program that can be used to compose a new body or body part in the given
format. (Currently unused.)
composetyped
- Similar to the
compose field, but is to be used
when the composing program needs to specify the
‘Content-type: ’ header field to be
applied to the composed data. (Currently unused.)
copiousoutput
- A flag field which indicates that the output of the
view command is integrable into S-nails normal
visual display. It is mutually exclusive with
needsterminal .
description
- A textual description that describes this type of data. The text may
optionally be enclosed within double quotation marks
‘
" ’.
edit
- A program that can be used to edit a body or body part in the given
format. (Currently unused.)
nametemplate
- This field specifies a filename format for the
‘
%s ’ format used in the shell
command fields, in which ‘%s ’ will
be replaced by a random string. (The filename is also stored in and passed
to subprocesses via MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY .) The
standard says this is “only expected to be relevant in environments
where filename extensions are meaningful”, and so this field is
ignored unless the ‘%s ’ is a prefix,
optionally followed by (ASCII) alphabetic and numeric characters, the
underscore and the period. For example, to specify that a JPG file is to
be passed to an image viewer with a name ending in
‘.jpg ’,
‘nametemplate=%s.jpg ’ can be
used.
needsterminal
- This flag field indicates that the given shell command must be run on an
interactive terminal. S-nail will temporarily release the terminal to the
given command in interactive mode, in non-interactive mode this entry will
be entirely ignored; this flag implies
x-mailx-noquote .
print
- A program that can be used to print a message or body part in the given
format. (Currently unused.)
test
- Specifies a program to be run to test some condition, for example, the
machine architecture, or the window system in use, to determine whether or
not this mailcap entry applies. If the test fails, a subsequent mailcap
entry should be sought; also see
x-mailx-test-once . Standard I/O of the test
program is redirected from and to /dev/null, and
the format ‘%s ’ is not supported
(the data does not yet exist).
textualnewlines
- A flag field which indicates that this type of data is line-oriented and
that, if encoded in ‘
base64 ’, all
newlines should be converted to canonical form (CRLF) before encoding, and
will be in that form after decoding. (Currently unused.)
x11-bitmap
- Names a file, in X11 bitmap (xbm) format, which points to an appropriate
icon to be used to visually denote the presence of this kind of data. This
field is not used by S-nail.
x-mailx-async
- Extension flag field that denotes that the given
view command shall be executed asynchronously,
without blocking S-nail. Cannot be used in conjunction with
needsterminal ; the standard output of the command
will go to /dev/null.
x-mailx-noquote
- An extension flag field that indicates that even a
copiousoutput view command
shall not be used when quoteing messages, as it
would by default.
x-mailx-test-once
- Extension flag which denotes whether the given
test command shall be evaluated once only with its
exit status being cached. This is handy if some global unchanging
condition is to be queried, like “running under the X Window
System”.
x-mailx-tmpfile
- Extension flag field that requests creation of a zero-sized temporary
file, the name of which is to be placed in the environment variable
MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY . It is an error to use
this flag with commands that include a
‘%s ’ format (because that is
implemented by means of this temporary file).
x-mailx-tmpfile-fill
- Normally the MIME part content is passed to the handler via standard
input; if this flag is set then the data will instead be written into the
implied
x-mailx-tmpfile . In order to cause
deletion of the temporary file you will have to set
x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink explicitly! It is an error
to use this flag with commands that include a
‘%s ’ format.
x-mailx-tmpfile-unlink
- Extension flag field that requests that the temporary file shall be
deleted automatically when the command loop is entered again at latest. It
is an error to use this flag with commands that include a
‘
%s ’ format, or in conjunction with
x-mailx-async .
x-mailx-tmpfile is implied.
x-mailx-last-resort
- An extension flag that indicates that this handler shall only be used as a
last resort, when no other source (see
HTML mail and MIME
attachments) provides a MIME handler.
x-mailx-ignore
- An extension that enforces that this handler is not used at all.
The standard includes the possibility to define any number of
additional fields, prefixed by ‘x- ’.
Flag fields apply to the entire “Mailcap” entry — in
some unusual cases, this may not be desirable, but differentiation can be
accomplished via separate entries, taking advantage of the fact that
subsequent entries are searched if an earlier one does not provide enough
information. For example, if a view command needs to
specify the needsterminal flag, but the
compose command shall not, the following will help
out the latter:
application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; needsterminal
application/postscript; ps-to-terminal %s; compose=idraw %s
In value parts of command fields any occurrence of the format
string ‘%t ’ will be replaced by the
‘TYPE/SUBTYPE ’ specification. Any
named parameter from a messages'
‘Content-type: ’ field may be embedded
into the command line using the format
‘%{ ’ followed by the parameter name
and a closing brace ‘} ’ character. The
entire parameter should appear as a single command line argument, regardless
of embedded spaces, shell quoting will be performed by the RFC 1524
processor, thus:
# Message
Content-type: multipart/mixed; boundary=42
# Mailcap file
multipart/*; /usr/local/bin/showmulti \
%t %{boundary} ; composetyped = /usr/local/bin/makemulti
# Executed shell command
/usr/local/bin/showmulti multipart/mixed 42
Note that S-nail does not support handlers for multipart MIME
parts as shown in this example (as of today). It does not support the
additional formats ‘%n ’ and
‘%F ’. An example file, also showing
how to properly deal with the expansion of
‘%s ’, which includes any quotes that
are necessary to make it a valid shell argument by itself and thus will
cause undesired behaviour when placed in additional user-provided
quotes:
# Comment line
text/richtext; richtext %s; copiousoutput
text/x-perl; perl -cWT %s; nametemplate = %s.pl
# Exit EX_TEMPFAIL=75 on signal
application/pdf; \
infile=%s\; \
trap "rm -f ${infile}" EXIT\; \
trap "exit 75" INT QUIT TERM\; \
mupdf "${infile}"; \
test = [ -n "${DISPLAY}" ]; \
nametemplate = %s.pdf; x-mailx-async
application/pdf; pdftotext -layout - -; copiousoutput
application/*; echo "This is \\"%t\\" but \
is 50 \% Greek to me" \; < %s head -c 512 | cat -vet; \
copiousoutput; x-mailx-noquote; x-mailx-last-resort
Further reading:
HTML mail and MIME
attachments, The mime.types
files, mimetype ,
MAILCAPS ,
mime-counter-evidence,
pipe-TYPE/SUBTYPE,
pipe-EXTENSION.
User credentials for machine accounts (see
On URL syntax and
credential lookup) can be placed in the .netrc
file, which will be loaded and cached when requested by
netrc-lookup. The default location
~/.netrc may be overridden by the
NETRC environment variable. As long as syntax
constraints are honoured the file source may be replaced with the output of
the shell command set in netrc-pipe, to load an
encrypted file, for example. The cache can be managed with the command
netrc .
The file consists of space, tabulator or newline separated tokens.
This parser implements a superset of the original BSD syntax, but users
should nonetheless be aware of portability glitches, shall their
.netrc be usable across multiple programs and
platforms:
- BSD only supports double quotation marks, for example
‘
password "pass with
spaces" ’.
- BSD (only?) supports escaping of single characters via a reverse solidus
(a space could be escaped via
‘
\ ’), in- as well as outside
of a quoted string. This method is assumed to be present, and will
actively be used to quote double quotation marks
‘" ’ and reverse solidus
‘\ ’ characters inside the
login and password tokens,
for example for display purposes.
- BSD does not require a final quotation mark of the last user input
token.
- The original BSD (Berknet) parser also supported a format which allowed
tokens to be separated with commas – whereas at least
Hewlett-Packard still seems to support this syntax, this parser does
not!
- As a non-portable extension some widely-used programs support shell-style
comments: if an input line starts, after any amount of whitespace, with a
number sign ‘
# ’, then the rest of
the line is ignored.
- Whereas other programs may require that the .netrc
file is accessible by only the user if it contains a
password token for any other
login than “anonymous”, this parser
will always require these strict permissions.
Of the following list of supported tokens this parser uses (and
caches) machine , login and
password . An existing
default entry will not be used.
machine name
- The hostname of the entries' machine, lowercase-normalized before use. Any
further file content, until either end-of-file or the occurrence of
another
machine or a
default first-class token is bound (only related)
to the machine name.
As an extension that should not be the cause of any worries
this parser supports a single wildcard prefix for
name:
machine *.example.com login USER password PASS
machine pop3.example.com login USER password PASS
machine smtp.example.com login USER password PASS
which would match
‘xy.example.com ’ as well as
‘pop3.example.com ’, but neither
‘example.com ’ nor
‘local.smtp.example.com ’. In the
example neither ‘pop3.example.com ’
nor ‘smtp.example.com ’ will be
matched by the wildcard, since the exact matches take precedence (it is
however faster to specify it the other way around).
default
- This is the same as
machine except that it is a
fallback entry that is used shall none of the specified machines match;
only one default token may be specified, and it must be the last
first-class token.
login name
- The user name on the remote machine.
password string
- The user's password on the remote machine.
account string
- Supply an additional account password. This is merely for FTP
purposes.
macdef name
- Define a macro. A macro is defined with the specified
name; it is formed from all lines beginning with the
next line and continuing until a blank line is (consecutive newline
characters are) encountered. (Note that
macdef
entries cannot be utilized by multiple machines, too, but must be defined
following the machine they are intended to be used
with.) If a macro named init exists, it is
automatically run as the last step of the login process. This is merely
for FTP purposes.
# This example assumes v15.0 compatibility mode
set v15-compat
# Request strict TLL transport layer security checks
set tls-verify=strict
# Where are the up-to-date TLS certificates?
# (Since we manage up-to-date ones explicitly, do not use any,
# possibly outdated, default certificates shipped with OpenSSL)
#set tls-ca-dir=/etc/ssl/certs
set tls-ca-file=/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt
set tls-ca-no-defaults
#set tls-ca-flags=partial-chain
wysh set smime-ca-file="${tls-ca-file}" \
smime-ca-no-defaults #smime-ca-flags="${tls-ca-flags}"
# This could be outsourced to a central configuration file via
# tls-config-file plus tls-config-module if the used library allows.
# CipherString: explicitly define the list of ciphers, which may
# improve security, especially with protocols older than TLS v1.2.
# See ciphers(1). Possibly best to only use tls-config-pairs-HOST
# (or -USER@HOST), as necessary, again..
# Note that TLSv1.3 uses Ciphersuites= instead, which will join
# with CipherString (if protocols older than v1.3 are allowed)
# Curves: especially with TLSv1.3 curves selection may be desired.
# MinProtocol,MaxProtocol: do not use protocols older than TLS v1.2.
# Change this only when the remote server does not support it:
# maybe use chain support via tls-config-pairs-HOST / -USER@HOST
# to define such explicit exceptions, then, e.g.,
# MinProtocol=TLSv1.1
if "$tls-features" =% ,+ctx-set-maxmin-proto,
wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
MinProtocol=TLSv1.1'
else
wysh set tls-config-pairs='\
CipherString=TLSv1.2:!aNULL:!eNULL:@STRENGTH,\
Curves=P-521:P-384:P-256,\
Protocol=-ALL\,+TLSv1.1 \, +TLSv1.2\, +TLSv1.3'
endif
# Essential setting: select allowed character sets
set sendcharsets=utf-8,iso-8859-1
# A very kind option: when replying to a message, first try to
# use the same encoding that the original poster used herself!
set reply-in-same-charset
# When replying, do not merge From: and To: of the original message
# into To:. Instead old From: -> new To:, old To: -> merge Cc:.
set recipients-in-cc
# When sending messages, wait until the Mail-Transfer-Agent finishs.
# Only like this you will be able to see errors reported through the
# exit status of the MTA (including the built-in SMTP one)!
set sendwait
# Only use built-in MIME types, no mime.types(5) files
set mimetypes-load-control
# Default directory where we act in (relative to $HOME)
set folder=mail
# A leading "+" (often) means: under *folder*
# *record* is used to save copies of sent messages
set MBOX=+mbox.mbox DEAD=+dead.txt \
record=+sent.mbox record-files record-resent
# Make "file mymbox" and "file myrec" go to..
shortcut mymbox %:+mbox.mbox myrec +sent.mbox
# Not really optional, e.g., for S/MIME
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
# It may be necessary to set hostname and/or smtp-hostname
# if the "SERVER" of mta and "domain" of from do not match.
# The `urlencode' command can be used to encode USER and PASS
set mta=(smtps?|submissions?)://[USER[:PASS]@]SERVER[:PORT] \
smtp-auth=login/plain... \
smtp-use-starttls
# Never refuse to start into interactive mode, and more
set emptystart \
colour-pager crt= \
followup-to followup-to-honour=ask-yes fullnames \
history-file=+.s-nailhist history-size=-1 history-gabby \
mime-counter-evidence=0b1111 \
prompt='?\$?!\$!/\$^ERRNAME[\$account#\$mailbox-display]? ' \
reply-to-honour=ask-yes \
umask=
# Only include the selected header fields when typing messages
headerpick type retain from_ date from to cc subject \
message-id mail-followup-to reply-to
# ...when forwarding messages
headerpick forward retain subject date from to cc
# ...when saving message, etc.
#headerpick save ignore ^Original-.*$ ^X-.*$
# Some mailing lists
mlist '@xyz-editor\.xyz$' '@xyzf\.xyz$'
mlsubscribe '^xfans@xfans\.xyz$'
# Handle a few file extensions (to store MBOX databases)
filetype bz2 'bzip2 -dc' 'bzip2 -zc' \
gz 'gzip -dc' 'gzip -c' xz 'xz -dc' 'xz -zc' \
zst 'zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc' \
zst.pgp 'gpg -d | zstd -dc' 'zstd -19 -zc | gpg -e'
# A real life example of a very huge free mail provider
# Instead of directly placing content inside `account',
# we `define' a macro: like that we can switch "accounts"
# from within *on-compose-splice*, for example!
define XooglX {
set folder=~/spool/XooglX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@examp.ple>'
set pop3-no-apop-pop.gmXil.com
shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.gmXil.com
shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.gmXil.com
# Or, entirely IMAP based setup
#set folder=imaps://imap.gmail.com record="+[Gmail]/Sent Mail" \
# imap-cache=~/spool/cache
set mta=smtp://USER:PASS@smtp.gmXil.com smtp-use-starttls
# Alternatively:
set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.gmail.com:465
}
account XooglX {
\call XooglX
}
# Here is a pretty large one which does not allow sending mails
# if there is a domain name mismatch on the SMTP protocol level,
# which would bite us if the value of from does not match, e.g.,
# for people who have a sXXXXeforge project and want to speak
# with the mailing list under their project account (in from),
# still sending the message through their normal mail provider
define XandeX {
set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
shortcut pop %:pop3s://pop.yaXXex.com
shortcut imap %:imaps://imap.yaXXex.com
set mta=smtps://USER:PASS@smtp.yaXXex.com:465 \
hostname=yaXXex.com smtp-hostname=
}
account XandeX {
\call Xandex
}
# Create some new commands so that, e.g., `ls /tmp' will..
commandalias lls '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlrS'
commandalias llS '!ls ${LS_COLOUR_FLAG} -aFlS'
set pipe-message/external-body='?* echo $MAILX_EXTERNAL_BODY_URL'
# We do not support gpg(1) directly yet. But simple --clearsign'd
# message parts can be dealt with as follows:
define V {
localopts yes
wysh set pipe-text/plain=$'?*#++=?\
< "${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" awk \
-v TMPFILE="${MAILX_FILENAME_TEMPORARY}" \'\
BEGIN{done=0}\
/^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNED MESSAGE-----/,/^$/ {\
if(done++ != 0)\
next;\
print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
system("gpg --verify " TMPFILE " 2>&1");\
print "--- GPG --verify ---";\
print "";\
next;\
}\
/^-----BEGIN PGP SIGNATURE-----/,\
/^-----END PGP SIGNATURE-----/{\
next;\
}\
{print}\
\''
print
}
commandalias V '\'call V
When storing passwords in ~/.mailrc
appropriate permissions should be set on this file with
‘$ chmod 0600 ~/.mailrc ’. If the
[Option]al netrc-lookup is available user credentials
can be stored in the central ~/.netrc file instead;
e.g., here is a different version of the example account that sets up SMTP
and POP3:
define XandeX {
set folder=~/spool/XandeX inbox=+syste.mbox sent=+sent
set from='Your Name <address@exam.ple>'
set netrc-lookup
# Load an encrypted ~/.netrc by uncommenting the next line
#set netrc-pipe='gpg -qd ~/.netrc.pgp'
set mta=smtps://smtp.yXXXXx.ru:465 \
smtp-hostname= hostname=yXXXXx.com
set pop3-keepalive=240 pop3-no-apop-pop.yXXXXx.ru
commandalias xp fi pop3s://pop.yXXXXx.ru
}
account XandeX {
\call XandeX
}
and, in the ~/.netrc file:
machine *.yXXXXx.ru login USER password PASS
This configuration should now work just fine:
$ echo text | s-nail -dvv -AXandeX -s
Subject user@exam.ple
[Option] The first thing that is needed for
Signed and
encrypted messages with S/MIME is a personal certificate, and a private
key. The certificate contains public information, in particular a name and
email address(es), and the public key that can be used by others to encrypt
messages for the certificate holder (the owner of the private key), and to
verify signed messages generated with that
certificate('s private key). Whereas the certificate is included in each
signed message, the private key must be kept secret. It is used to decrypt
messages that were previously encrypted with the public key, and to sign
messages.
For personal use it is recommended to get a S/MIME certificate
from one of the major CAs on the Internet. Many CAs offer such certificates
for free. Usually offered is a combined certificate and private key in
PKCS#12 format which S-nail does not accept directly. To convert it to PEM
format, the following shell command can be used; please read on for how to
use these PEM files.
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out certpem.pem -clcerts -nodes
$ # Alternatively
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out cert.pem -clcerts -nokeys
$ openssl pkcs12 -in cert.p12 -out key.pem -nocerts -nodes
There is also
https://www.CAcert.org which
issues client and server certificates to members of their community for
free; their root certificate
(https://www.cacert.org/certs/root.crt)
is often not in the default set of trusted CA root certificates, though,
which means their root certificate has to be downloaded separately, and
needs to be part of the S/MIME certificate validation chain by including it
in smime-ca-dir or as a vivid member of the
smime-ca-file. But let us take a step-by-step tour on
how to setup S/MIME with a certificate from CAcert.org despite this
situation!
First of all you will have to become a member of the CAcert.org
community, simply by registrating yourself via the web interface. Once you
are, create and verify all email addresses you want to be able to create
signed and encrypted messages for/with using the corresponding entries of
the web interface. Now ready to create S/MIME certificates, so let us create
a new “client certificate”, ensure to include all email
addresses that should be covered by the certificate in the following web
form, and also to use your name as the “common name”.
Create a private key and a certificate request on your local
computer (please see the manual pages of the used commands for more in-depth
knowledge on what the used arguments etc. do):
$ openssl req -nodes -newkey rsa:4096
-keyout key.pem -out creq.pem
Afterwards copy-and-paste the content of “creq.pem”
into the certificate-request (CSR) field of the web form on the CAcert.org
website (you may need to unfold some “advanced options” to see
the corresponding text field). This last step will ensure that your private
key (which never left your box) and the certificate belong together (through
the public key that will find its way into the certificate via the
certificate-request). You are now ready and can create your CAcert certified
certificate. Download and store or copy-and-paste it as
“pub.crt”.
Yay. In order to use your new S/MIME setup a combined private
key/public key (certificate) file has to be created:
$ cat key.pem pub.crt >
ME@HERE.com.paired
This is the file S-nail will work with. If you have created your
private key with a passphrase then S-nail will ask you for it whenever a
message is signed or decrypted, unless this operation has been automated as
described in
Signed and
encrypted messages with S/MIME. Set the following variables to
henceforth use S/MIME (setting smime-ca-file is of
interest for verification only):
? set smime-ca-file=ALL-TRUSTED-ROOT-CERTS-HERE \
smime-sign-cert=ME@HERE.com.paired \
smime-sign-digest=SHA512 \
smime-sign from=myname@my.host
[Option] Certification authorities (CAs) issue certificate revocation lists
(CRLs) on a regular basis. These lists contain the serial numbers of
certificates that have been declared invalid after they have been issued. Such
usually happens because the private key for the certificate has been
compromised, because the owner of the certificate has left the organization
that is mentioned in the certificate, etc. To seriously use S/MIME or TLS
verification, an up-to-date CRL is required for each trusted CA. There is
otherwise no method to distinguish between valid and invalidated certificates.
S-nail currently offers no mechanism to fetch CRLs, nor to access them on the
Internet, so they have to be retrieved by some external mechanism.
S-nail accepts CRLs in PEM format only; CRLs in DER format must be
converted, like, e.g.:
$ openssl crl -inform DER -in crl.der
-out crl.pem
To tell S-nail about the CRLs, a directory that contains all CRL
files (and no other files) must be created. The
smime-crl-dir or tls-crl-dir
variables, respectively, must then be set to point to that directory. After
that, S-nail requires a CRL to be present for each CA that is used to verify
a certificate.
In general it is a good idea to turn on debug
(-d ) and / or verbose
(-v , twice) if something does not work well. Very
often a diagnostic message can be produced that leads to the problems'
solution.
This can have two reasons, one is the necessity to wait for a file lock and
cannot be helped, the other being that S-nail calls the function
uname(2)
in order to query the nodename of the box (sometimes the real one is needed
instead of the one represented by the internal variable
hostname). One may have varying success by ensuring that
the real hostname and ‘localhost ’ have
entries in /etc/hosts, or, more generally, that the
name service is properly setup – and does
hostname(1)
return the expected value? Does this local hostname have a domain suffix? RFC
6762 standardized the link-local top-level domain
‘.local ’, try again after adding an
(additional) entry with this extension.
Since 2014 some free service providers classify programs as “less
secure” unless they use a special authentication method (OAuth 2.0)
which was not standardized for non-HTTP protocol authentication token query
until August 2015 (RFC 7628).
Different to Kerberos / GSSAPI, which is developed since the mid
of the 1980s, where a user can easily create a local authentication ticket
for her- and himself with the locally installed
kinit(1)
program, that protocol has no such local part but instead requires a
world-wide-web query to create or fetch a token; since there is no local
cache this query would have to be performed whenever S-nail is invoked (in
interactive sessions situation may differ).
S-nail does not directly support OAuth. It, however, supports
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER, see
But, how about
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER? If that is not used it is necessary to declare
S-nail a “less secure app” (on the providers account web page)
in order to read and send mail. However, it also seems possible to take the
following steps instead:
- give the provider the number of a mobile phone,
- enable “2-Step Verification”,
- create an application specific password (16 characters), and
- use that special password instead of the real Google account password in
S-nail (for more on that see the section
On URL syntax
and credential lookup).
Following up
I
cannot login to Google mail (via OAuth) one OAuth-based authentication
method is available: the OAuth 2.0 bearer token usage as standardized in RFC
6750 (according SASL mechanism in RFC 7628), also known as XOAUTH2 and
OAUTHBEARER, allows fetching a temporary access token via the web that can
locally be used as a password. The protocol is simple
and extendable, token updates or even password changes via a simple TLS
secured server login would be possible in theory, but today a web browser and
an external support tool are prerequisites for using this authentication
method. The token times out and must be periodically refreshed via the web.
Some hurdles must be taken before being able to use this method.
Using GMail as an example, an application (that is a name) must be
registered, for which credentials, a “client ID” and a
“client secret”, need to be created and saved locally (in a
secure way). These initial configuration steps can be performed at
https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials.
Thereafter a refresh token can be requested; a python program to do this for
GMail accounts is
https://github.com/google/gmail-oauth2-tools/raw/master/python/oauth2.py:
$ python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
--client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
--generate_oauth2_token
To authorize token, visit this url and follow the directions:
https://accounts.google.com/o/oauth2/auth?client_id=...
Enter verification code: ...
Refresh Token: ...
Access Token: ...
Access Token Expiration Seconds: 3600
$ # Of which the last three are actual token responses.
$ # Thereafter access tokens can regularly be refreshed
$ # via the created refresh token (read on)
The generated refresh token must also be saved locally (securely).
The procedure as a whole can be read at
https://github.com/google/gmail-oauth2-tools/wiki/OAuth2DotPyRunThrough.
Since periodic timers are not yet supported, keeping an access token
up-to-date (from within S-nail) can only be performed via the hook
on-main-loop-tick, or (for sending only)
on-compose-enter (for more on authentication please
see the section On
URL syntax and credential lookup):
set on-main-loop-tick=o-m-l-t on-compose-enter=o-c-e
define o-m-l-t {
xcall update_access_token
}
define o-c-e {
xcall update_access_token
}
set access_token_=0
define update_access_token {
local set i epoch_sec epoch_nsec
vput vexpr i epoch
eval set $i # set epoch_sec/_nsec of vexpr epoch
vput vexpr i + $access_token_ 2100
if $epoch_sec -ge $i
vput ! password python oauth2.py --user=EMAIL \
--client-id=THE-ID --client-secret=THE-SECRET \
--refresh-token=THE-REFRESH-TOKEN |\
sed '1b PASS;d; :PASS s/^.\{1,\}:\(.\{1,\}\)$/\1/'
vput csop password trim "$password"
if -n "$verbose"
echo password is <$password>
endif
set access_token_=$epoch_sec
endif
}
Two thinkable situations: the first is a shadowed sequence; setting
debug, or the most possible
verbose mode, causes a printout of the
bind tree after that is built; being a cache, this
happens only upon startup or after modifying bindings.
Or second, terminal libraries (see
On terminal
control and line editor, bind ,
termcap) may report different codes than the terminal
really sends, rendering bindings dysfunctional because expected and received
data do not match; the verbose listing of
bind ings will show the byte sequences that are
expected. (One common source of problems is that the — possibly even
non-existing — keypad is not turned on, and the resulting layout
reports the keypad control codes for the normal keyboard keys.)
To overcome the situation use for example the program
cat(1)
with its option -v , if available, to see the byte
sequences which are actually produced by keypresses, and use the variable
termcap to make S-nail aware of them. The terminal
this is typed on produces some unexpected sequences, here for an example the
shifted home key:
? set verbose
? bind*
# 1B 5B=[ 31=1 3B=; 32=2 48=H
bind base :kHOM z0
? x
$ cat -v
^[[H
$ s-nail -v -Stermcap='kHOM=\E[H'
? bind*
# 1B 5B=[ 48=H
bind base :kHOM z0
Yes. Put (at least parts of) the following in your
~/.gitconfig:
[sendemail]
smtpserver = /usr/bin/s-nail
smtpserveroption = -t
#smtpserveroption = -Sexpandaddr
smtpserveroption = -Athe-account-you-need
##
suppresscc = all
suppressfrom = false
assume8bitEncoding = UTF-8
#to = /tmp/OUT
confirm = always
chainreplyto = true
multiedit = false
thread = true
quiet = true
annotate = true
Newer
git(1)
versions (v2.33.0) added the option sendmailCmd .
Patches can also be send directly, for example:
$ git format-patch -M --stdout HEAD^ |
s-nail -A the-account-you-need -t RECEIVER
folder sometimes fails to open MBOX mail databases
because creation of dotlock files is
impossible due to existing but unowned lock files. S-nail does not offer an
option to deal with those files, because it is considered a site policy what
counts as unowned, and what not. The site policy is usually defined by
administrator(s), and expressed in the configuration of a locally installed
MTA (for example Postfix
‘stale_lock_time=500s ’). Therefore the
suggestion:
$ </dev/null s-nail -s 'MTA: be no frog, handle lock' $LOGNAME
By sending a mail to yourself the local MTA can use its normal
queue mechanism to try the delivery multiple times, finally decide a lock
file has become stale, and remove it.
[Option]ally there is IMAP client support available. This part of the program is
obsolete and will vanish in v15 with the large MIME and I/O layer rewrite,
because it uses old-style blocking I/O and makes excessive use of signal based
long code jumps. Support can hopefully be readded later based on a new-style
I/O, with SysV signal handling. In fact the IMAP support had already been
removed from the codebase, but was reinstantiated on user demand: in effect
the IMAP code is at the level of S-nail v14.8.16 (with
imapcodec being the sole exception), and should be
treated with some care.
IMAP uses the ‘imap:// ’ and
‘imaps:// ’ protocol prefixes, and an
IMAP-based folder may be used. IMAP URLs (paths)
undergo inspections and possible transformations before use (and the command
imapcodec can be used to manually apply them to any
given argument). Hierarchy delimiters are normalized, a step which is
configurable via the imap-delim variable chain, but
defaults to the first seen delimiter otherwise. S-nail supports
internationalised IMAP names, and en- and decodes the names from and to the
ttycharset as necessary and possible. If a mailbox
name is expanded (see
Filename transformations)
to an IMAP mailbox, all names that begin with `+' then refer to IMAP
mailboxes below the folder target box, while folder
names prefixed by `@' refer to folders below the hierarchy base, so the
following will list all folders below the current one when in an IMAP
mailbox: ‘folders @ ’.
Note: some IMAP servers do not accept the creation of mailboxes in
the hierarchy base, but require that they are created as subfolders of
`INBOX' – with such servers a folder name of the form
imaps://mylogin@imap.myisp.example/INBOX.
should be used (the last character is the server's hierarchy
delimiter). The following IMAP-specific commands exist:
cache
- Only applicable to cached IMAP mailboxes; takes a message list and reads
the specified messages into the IMAP cache.
connect
- If operating in disconnected mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to online
mode and connect to the mail server while retaining the mailbox status.
See the description of the disconnected variable for
more information.
disconnect
- If operating in online mode on an IMAP mailbox, switch to disconnected
mode while retaining the mailbox status. See the description of the
disconnected variable for more. A list of messages
may optionally be given as argument; the respective messages are then read
into the cache before the connection is closed, thus
‘
disco * ’ makes the entire mailbox
available for disconnected use.
imap
- Sends command strings directly to the current IMAP server. S-nail operates
always in IMAP `selected state' on the current mailbox; commands that
change this will produce undesirable results and should be avoided. Useful
IMAP commands are:
- create
- Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument and creates it.
- getquotaroot
- (RFC 2087) Takes the name of an IMAP mailbox as an argument and prints
the quotas that apply to the mailbox. Not all IMAP servers support
this command.
- namespace
- (RFC 2342) Takes no arguments and prints the Personal Namespaces, the
Other User's Namespaces and the Shared Namespaces. Each namespace type
is printed in parentheses; if there are multiple namespaces of the
same type, inner parentheses separate them. For each namespace a
prefix and a hierarchy separator is listed. Not all IMAP servers
support this command.
imapcodec
- Perform IMAP path transformations. Supports
vput
(see Command modifiers), and
manages the error number !. The first argument
specifies the operation: e[ncode] normalizes
hierarchy delimiters (see imap-delim) and converts
the strings from the locale ttycharset to the
internationalized variant used by IMAP, d[ecode]
performs the reverse operation. Encoding will honour the (global) value of
imap-delim.
The following IMAP-specific internal variables exist:
- disconnected
- (Boolean) When an IMAP mailbox is selected and this variable is set, no
connection to the server is initiated. Instead, data is obtained from the
local cache (see imap-cache). Mailboxes that are not
present in the cache and messages that have not yet entirely been fetched
from the server are not available; to fetch all messages in a mailbox at
once, the command `
copy *
/dev/null ' can be used while still in connected mode. Changes that
are made to IMAP mailboxes in disconnected mode are queued and committed
later when a connection to that server is made. This procedure is not
completely reliable since it cannot be guaranteed that the IMAP unique
identifiers (UIDs) on the server still match the ones in the cache at that
time. Data is saved to DEAD when this problem
occurs.
- disconnected-USER@HOST
- The specified account is handled as described for the
disconnected variable above, but other accounts are
not affected.
- imap-auth-USER@HOST,
imap-auth
- Sets the IMAP authentication method. Supported are the default
‘
login ’ (called
‘plain ’ by some servers),
[v15-compat] ‘oauthbearer ’ (see
FAQ entry
But, how about
XOAUTH2 / OAUTHBEARER?), [v15-compat]
‘external ’ and
‘externanon ’ (for TLS secured
connections which pass a client certificate via
tls-config-pairs), as well as the [Option]al
‘cram-md5 ’ and
‘gssapi ’. All methods need a
user and a password except
‘gssapi ’ and
‘external ’, which only need the
former. ‘externanon ’ solely builds
upon the credentials passed via a client certificate, and is usually the
way to go since tested servers do not actually follow RFC 4422, and fail
if additional credentials are actually passed.
- imap-cache
- Enables caching of IMAP mailboxes. The value of this variable must point
to a directory that is either existent or can be created by S-nail. All
contents of the cache can be deleted by S-nail at any time; it is not safe
to make assumptions about them.
- imap-delim-USER@HOST,
imap-delim-HOST, imap-delim
- The hierarchy separator used by the IMAP server. Whenever an IMAP path is
specified it will undergo normalization. One of the normalization steps is
the squeezing and adjustment of hierarchy separators. If this variable is
set, any occurrence of any character of the given value that exists in the
path will be replaced by the first member of the value; an empty value
will cause the default to be used, it is
‘
/. ’. If not set, we will reuse the
first hierarchy separator character that is discovered in a user-given
mailbox name.
- imap-keepalive-USER@HOST,
imap-keepalive-HOST,
imap-keepalive
- IMAP servers may close the connection after a period of inactivity; the
standard requires this to be at least 30 minutes, but practical experience
may vary. Setting this variable to a numeric `value' greater than 0 causes
a `NOOP' command to be sent each `value' seconds if no other operation is
performed.
- imap-list-depth
- When retrieving the list of folders on an IMAP server, the
folders command stops after it has reached a
certain depth to avoid possible infinite loops. The value of this variable
sets the maximum depth allowed. The default is 2. If the folder separator
on the current IMAP server is a slash `/', this variable has no effect and
the folders command does not descend to
subfolders.
- imap-use-starttls-USER@HOST,
imap-use-starttls-HOST,
imap-use-starttls
- Causes S-nail to issue a `STARTTLS' command to make an unencrypted IMAP
session TLS encrypted. This functionality is not supported by all servers,
and is not used if the session is already encrypted by the IMAPS
method.
bogofilter(1),
gpg(1),
more(1),
newaliases(1),
openssl(1),
sendmail(1),
sh(1),
spamassassin(1),
iconv(3),
setlocale(3),
aliases(5),
termcap(5),
terminfo(5),
locale(7),
mailaddr(7),
re_format(7)
(or regex(7)),
mailwrapper(8),
sendmail(8)
M. Douglas McIlroy writes in his article “A Research UNIX Reader:
Annotated Excerpts from the Programmer's Manual, 1971-1986” that a
mail(1)
command already appeared in First Edition UNIX in
1971:
Electronic mail was there from the start. Never
satisfied with its exact behavior, everybody touched it at one time or
another: to assure the safety of simultaneous access, to improve privacy, to
survive crashes, to exploit uucp, to screen out foreign freeloaders, or
whatever. Not until v7 did the interface change (Thompson). Later, as mail
became global in its reach, Dave Presotto took charge and brought order to
communications with a grab-bag of external networks (v8).
BSD Mail, in large parts compatible with
UNIX mail, was written in 1978 by Kurt Shoens and
developed as part of the BSD
UNIX distribution until 1995. This manual page is
derived from “The Mail Reference Manual” that Kurt Shoens
wrote for Mail 1.3, included in 3BSD in 1980. The common
UNIX and BSD denominator
became standardized as
mailx(1)
in the X/Open Portability Guide Issue 2 (January 1987). After the rise of
Open Source BSD variants Mail saw continuous
development in the individual code forks, noticeably by Christos Zoulas in
NetBSD. Based upon this Nail, later Heirloom Mailx,
was developed by Gunnar Ritter in the years 2000 until 2008. Since 2012
S-nail is maintained by Steffen Nurpmeso.
Electronic mail exchange in general is a concept even older. The
earliest well documented electronic mail system was part of the Compatible
Time Sharing System (CTSS) at MIT, its MAIL command had been proposed in a
staff planning memo at the end of 1964 and was implemented in mid-1965 when
Tom Van Vleck and Noel Morris wrote the necessary code. Similar
communication programs were built for other timesharing systems. One of the
most ambitious and influential was Murray Turoff's EMISARI. Created in 1971
for the United States Office of Emergency Preparedness, EMISARI combined
private electronic messages with a chat system, public postings, voting, and
a user directory.
During the 1960s it was common to connect a large number of
terminals to a single, central computer. Connecting two computers together
was relatively unusual. This began to change with the development of the
ARPANET, the ancestor of today's Internet. In 1971 Ray Tomlinson adapted the
SNDMSG program, originally developed for the University of California at
Berkeley timesharing system, to give it the ability to transmit a message
across the network into the mailbox of a user on a different computer. For
the first time it was necessary to specify the recipient's computer as well
as an account name. Tomlinson decided that the underused commercial at
‘@ ’ would work to separate the
two.
Sending a message across the network was originally treated as a
special instance of transmitting a file, and so a MAIL command was included
in RFC 385 on file transfer in 1972. Because it was not always clear when or
where a message had come from, RFC 561 in 1973 aimed to formalize electronic
mail headers, including “from”, “date”, and
“subject”. In 1975 RFC 680 described fields to help with the
transmission of messages to multiple users, including “to”,
“cc”, and “bcc”. In 1977 these features and
others went from best practices to a binding standard in RFC 733. Queen
Elizabeth II of England became the first head of state to send electronic
mail on March 26 1976 while ceremonially opening a building in the British
Royal Signals and Radar Establishment (RSRE) in Malvern.
Kurt Shoens, Edward Wang,
Keith Bostic, Christos Zoulas,
Gunnar Ritter. S-nail is developed by
Steffen Nurpmeso
⟨s-mailx@lists.sdaoden.eu⟩.
[v15 behaviour may differ] Interrupting an operation via
SIGINT aka
‘control-C ’ from anywhere else but a
command prompt is very problematic and likely to leave the program in an
undefined state: many library functions cannot deal with the
siglongjmp (3) that this software
(still) performs; even though efforts have been taken to address this, no
sooner but in v15 it will have been worked out: interruptions have not been
disabled in order to allow forceful breakage of hanging network connections,
for example (all this is unrelated to ignore).
The SMTP and POP3 protocol support of S-nail is very basic. Also,
if it fails to contact its upstream SMTP server, it will not make further
attempts to transfer the message at a later time (setting
save and sendwait may be
useful). If this is a concern, it might be better to set up a local SMTP
server that is capable of message queuing.
When a network-based mailbox is open, directly changing to another network-based
mailbox of a different protocol (i.e., from POP3 to IMAP or vice versa) will
cause a “deadlock”.
After deleting some message of a POP3 mailbox the header summary
falsely claims that there are no messages to display, one needs to perform a
scroll or dot movement to restore proper state.
In ‘thread ’ed
sort mode a power user may encounter crashes very
occasionally (this is may and very).
Please report bugs to the contact-mail
address, for example from within s-nail: ‘?
eval mail
$contact-mail ’. Including the verbose
output of the command version may be helpful:
? wysh set escape=! verbose; vput version xy; unset verbose;\
eval mail $contact-mail
Bug subject
!I xy
!.
Information on the web at ‘$ s-nail -X
'echo $contact-web; x' ’.
Visit the GSP FreeBSD Man Page Interface. Output converted with ManDoc. |